JP2020028683A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing the interest in reporting useful information to a player.SOLUTION: In a predetermined area in the game area, a distribution device (e.g., a prize ball distributor 900) capable of distributing a movement path of game balls is provided. The distribution device can sequentially execute performance display in a different display mode for each distribution destination of the game balls. A display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 16) displays the history of the performance display result when the game balls are distributed. When the performance display result when the game balls are distributed becomes a predetermined result, notification of useful information to the player (e.g., a predetermined suggestion performance capable of suggesting set value information) can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and based on the result of the lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  In this type of gaming machine, a game ball fired by a player's operation rolls while colliding with a game nail or the like provided in a game area, and finally enters a start port or a winning opening. When the player does (or passes), the above-mentioned lottery is performed or the prize balls are paid out, so that the player can obtain an advantageous game result.

  As this type of gaming machine, the special game state to be shifted when a game ball enters a specific area includes a first special game state advantageous to the player and a second special game state unfavorable to the player. Which special game state is to be set is determined by lottery when a game ball enters the starting port, and it is determined that a transition to the first special game state is made. Is disclosed, it is possible to inform the player of advantageous information indicating that the gaming state becomes the first special gaming state when the gaming state is satisfied (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-104100

  By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the movement direction of the game ball also changes to some extent as the force of firing the game ball is adjusted by the operation of the player, which is one factor of the fun of the game. .

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, it cannot be said that whether or not the advantage information is notified does not sufficiently reflect the interest of the moving direction of the game ball, and thus the player's desire to play or play the game. It is thought that there is room for devising that can further improve the fun of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in reporting useful information to a player.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A distribution device (e.g., Kloon 900) provided in a game area (e.g., the game area 20) where the game balls can roll and capable of distributing the movement path of the game balls;
A display device capable of displaying various information (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
With
The distribution device,
It is possible to sequentially display effects in different display modes for each distribution destination of the game ball,
The display device,
While it is possible to display the history of the effect display results when the game balls are distributed by the distribution device (for example, a ball entry history),
When the effect display result when the game balls are sorted by the sorting device is a predetermined result (for example, a predetermined entering pattern (display mode)), predetermined information (for example, setting (Suggested effect) can be notified.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), if the degree of advantage of the player is different, Setting change control means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) Further comprising
The predetermined information is:
It is information on a set value set by the setting change control means.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The distribution device,
A cleaning device having a plurality of passing ports (for example, a first passing port 901 to a third passing port 903);
It has a plurality of effect display areas (first area 911 to third area 913) corresponding to each of the plurality of passage openings,
The display device,
When passing through any of the plurality of passage openings, the history of the display mode of the corresponding effect display area can be displayed for a predetermined number of times,
When the history of the predetermined number of times has a predetermined pattern, the predetermined information can be notified.

  According to the gaming machines of the above (1) to (3), a distribution device (for example, Kloon 900) capable of distributing a movement path of a game ball in a predetermined area in a game area is provided. In addition, the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) displays a history of distribution results of the distribution device. Then, when the distribution result of the distribution device becomes a predetermined result, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestion effect that can suggest setting value information) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to improve the interest regarding the notification of useful information to a player.

It is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example showing an exploded front perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, as viewed obliquely from the upper right. It is an example of the front view showing the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display sections. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the table which shows the probability of the big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration design determination table memorize | stored in the program ROM of a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game permission processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of abnormal time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a power failure. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a system timer interrupt process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input detection process performed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting opening winning detection processing by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting check process performed by a main CPU 101. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process performed by a sub CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process performed by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command transmission process by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message setting process by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a direct table registration process performed by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message transmission process by a sub CPU. 13 is a table showing an example of a selectivity of the number of limiters in a pachinko gaming machine of an extended example 1 for each set value. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect in which a game ball passes through the role actor continuous operation right gate. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect in which a game ball passes through the left-gate for consecutively actors. It is a figure showing an example of a guide member and a displacement member in a pachinko gaming machine of an extension example 5. It is a figure showing an example of an operation mode of a displacement member. It is a figure showing an example of an operation mode of a displacement member. It is a figure showing an example of the distribution device in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 6. It is a figure showing an example of the cloon effect determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of the example 6 of expansion. It is a figure showing an example of the distribution device in the pachinko gaming machine of extension example 7. It is a figure showing an example of the cloon effect determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 7. It is a figure showing an example of the cloon effect determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 8. It is a figure showing an example of the fall probability setting in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 9.

[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention from the rear side. FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front right upper right side. FIG. 7 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. The directions shown in the drawings are directions in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" described in the right direction of the drawing means "right" in the drawing is "left" in a front view since the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where “right” is described in the left direction of the drawing, “left” in the drawing is “right” in the front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, the front-rear direction is defined as the front side and the back side is defined as the front side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front is a surface that is visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is a surface that is visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a firing device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, a payout unit 18, And a substrate unit 19.

  The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and has the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the firing device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. I support.

  The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be freely opened and closed. An opening 22 is provided in the glass door 13. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protection glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board unit 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are provided above the glass door 13. The loudspeaker 24 performs, for example, notification by voice, production, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 performs, for example, notification with light and effects.

  The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The plate unit 14 is arranged at a lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are fired from the launch device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. Game balls to be lent out or game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, a “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

  The firing device 15 is for firing game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The firing device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the plate unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the firing device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 31. The driving device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31 and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the firing handle 32 is operated by the player in the firing device 15, a game ball is fired by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the special symbol big hit determination (hereinafter, the special symbol big hit determination may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect design symbol (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during the big hit, a demonstration effect image, This includes the number of suspensions of variable display (variable display) of special symbols and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided, and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100, a sub-control board 40 having a sub-control circuit 200, and payout and launch of a game ball. A dispensing / emission control board 50 having a dispensing / emission control circuit 300 (see FIG. 8 described later) for controlling, a power supply unit 60 having a power supply circuit 338 (see FIG. 8 described later) for supplying power, and a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 8 described later).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of “1” to “6” in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting “6” is most advantageous to the player, and the smaller the value of the set value, the lower the advantage for the player gradually.

  In the main board case accommodating the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both shown in FIG. 8 described later) are accommodated. On the performance display monitor 334, for example, performance display data described later is displayed. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security from the viewpoint of the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “gaming machine manager”). ) To prevent the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 from being easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player). In addition, in the main board case, in addition to those in which the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, only the position corresponding to the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager and the back is exposed, Also includes those in which the responsible person can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the shot game balls can roll down.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the game board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game panel 20 with a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which the shot game balls can be rolled down is formed. A center unit 174, a normal electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172.

  An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a position where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 6, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are implanted. The game ball fired from the firing device 15 jumps out of the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20 and collides with a game nail or the like and flows downward under the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 includes two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 26a” and “inner rail 26b”). The game area 20 is defined (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the shot game balls to an upper portion of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is disposed on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is disposed above the game area 20, and divides a downflow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls fired by the firing device 15 are divided into left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with a game nail or the like provided, the water flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down areas of the shot game balls are distributed according to the operation amount of the firing handle 32. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742. Note that the method of hitting the game ball down the left area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hit", and the method of hitting the game ball down the right area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hit", It is allowed to be separated by the player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right in the game area 20 and below the pass gate 49.

  The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided at the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 8). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 8). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later. It is performed when it is done. In addition, the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later is displayed in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 in the special symbol. Is indicated by the stop display mode.

  In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol and second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

  The first starting port 420 provides an opportunity for a jackpot determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and causes the result of the jackpot determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display unit 73 described later. Is to give. The first starting port 420 is provided with a first starting port switch 421 (see FIG. 8). When a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 8), and a predetermined number of game balls are discharged from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handing.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in a front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in a front view. Conventionally, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 has often been arranged, for example, below the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be larger, and it has been difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially at the lower left of the gaming area 20.

  The second starting port 440 provides a trigger for a jackpot determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and a trigger for displaying the result of the jackpot determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is to give. The second starting port 440 is provided with a second starting port switch 441 (see FIG. 8). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 6), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the payout port 61. From the outlet 63 to the lower plate 27 (discharged). The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. Note that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handing in principle.

  As will be described in detail later, the ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 rotatable rightward, a starting-port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50), and a power of the starting-port solenoid 4630 for the blade member 4620. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) for transmitting the power to the motor. When the blade member 4620 is driven by the starting port solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state where game balls easily pass and a closed state where game balls hardly pass. It is composed of When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is driven, the game ball wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The pass gate 49 normally gives an opportunity for symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 8). When a game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially at the lower right of the game area 20 is that in recent years it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

  The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided at the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 8). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 8). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and is shifted to the big hit game state. Done in

  The general winning openings 53, 54 and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning opening 56 is arranged at the lower right of the gaming board unit 17. In addition, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a and 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 and 56 (see FIG. 8). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 have three prize balls, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 have 10 prize balls, and the large winning port 540 has three prize balls. The number of prize balls is set to 15, respectively. This value (the number of award balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost portion of the center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 finally flows in when the fired game ball does not win any of the starting ports or winning ports.

  The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 26. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display sections, a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol display section. It has a symbol holding display section 75 and a second special symbol holding display section 76.

  The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game for determining whether or not to drive the normal electric accessory 460 to be in an open state based on the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display section 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is usually displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter, referred to as “normal hit”), a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (normal symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning the game ball to 440 is changed.

  The ordinary symbol reserved display section 72 displays the number of times of execution of the suspended display of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspended regular symbols of variable display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of held normal symbol variable displays by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol variable display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. When the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 display the result of the judgment (big hit judgment) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or the maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

  The first special symbol display section 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a fluctuation display in response to a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (start winning), and also displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbols) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display section 74 includes a display LED group 74a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a fluctuation display in response to a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 440 (start prize), and displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the prize of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbol) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  As described above, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, a normal display is performed. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state which is a state advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the game is shifted to the big hit game state in which the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  The first special symbol holding display section 75 and the second special symbol holding display section 76 indicate the number of times of execution of the change display of the held special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of holding special pattern change display”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol holding display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of held special symbol change displays by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and includes various accessories such as an upper accessory 1000 arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when a game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, the first starting port switch 421 detects the winning game ball and starts the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first special symbol display portion 73. The storage is suspended (the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended). As for the suspension of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the change display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the change display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. In other words, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed. If a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 when the variable display is not performed for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the start memory is released, the first special symbol display unit 73 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the start of the change display of the second special symbol based on the game ball in the second starting port 440 is started. The storage is suspended (the execution of the change display of the second special symbol is suspended). As for the suspension of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the change display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the change display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. In other words, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variation display is stopped and displayed. If a game ball wins in the second starting port 440 when the variable display is not performed for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the holding of the start-up memory is released, the second special symbol display unit 74 starts to display the variation of the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed on one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display unit. . In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are held, regardless of which start memory is held first, the second special symbol is used. Priority is given to the release of the hold for the start memory, and the second special symbol display unit 74 displays the variation of the second special symbol.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the upper limit is set to four times for each of the variable display suspension counts of the first and second special symbols. Therefore, the maximum number of variable display of special symbols to be held is eight times, which is the total of the number of variable display of special symbols held by winning the first opening 420 and the second opening 440.

  In addition, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, the decorative symbol consisting of numbers is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 except for a specific case. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from “1” to “8” are used as the numbers. In addition, the decorative symbols which are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 are stopped while the first or second special symbols being variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 are stopped. Is displayed. The decorative design is also used as identification information for the effect.

  Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that a big hit has occurred. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of jackpots are provided. In addition, the big hit type is set according to a special symbol stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “main symbol”) when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. Thereby, the player can recognize the big hit type in addition to the big hit. Note that some of the jackpot types have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the first or second special symbol according to the specific stop display mode. According to this, it is difficult for the player to recognize the big hit and the big hit type.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 for controlling a game, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

  The main CPU 101 is connected to a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol start storage area of up to four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

  Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 for generating a reset signal when power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is turned off (power is turned off).

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol hold display section 75, The second special symbol holding display section 76, the starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the big winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 transmits data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 for managing a pachinko gaming machine in the entire hall. An external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

  Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a first starting port switch 421, a second starting port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, and the like. . When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure in accordance with an operation of a game arcade manager.

  Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is a key or a key which is a trigger for executing a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 is operable to be pressed, and is used to change a set value set in a setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting key.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / firing control circuit 300. The payout / firing control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a firing device 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370 in accordance with a player operation.

  Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / firing control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 350, Control is performed to cause the payout device 350 to pay out game balls. When the firing handle 32 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise, the payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotating angle (the amount of rotation). ) To control the firing of game balls.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 16, control on sound generated from the speaker 24, control on light from the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, while a signal is not supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control circuit 200 may be configured to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, a character control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is, another mode may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk drive, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after power-on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a read / write storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control on the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter, referred to as a VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal A D / A converter or the like for converting the data as is provided.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a frame buffer according to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data indicating a decorative design, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to a game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control relating to audio generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier for amplifying an audio signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

  The sound source IC controls a sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM according to an audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies an audio signal and generates a sound from the speaker 24.

  The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decorative lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and an accessory data ROM in which an operation pattern and a lighting pattern are stored. Etc.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM according to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read out from the accessory data ROM, and a driving signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

  The command input port 208 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and lending balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out gaming balls, and a game. A launching device 340 (launching device 15) for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power interruption in response to an operation of a game arcade administrator, and the like are connected.

  The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply a power supply voltage required for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like. .

  The power supply circuit 338 is connected to the power switch 35 and the like. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the information is stored in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. . Even in such a case, in the predetermined case, in addition to the case where the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, the correspondence between the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the above case. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager, , And those in which the gaming machine manager can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

[2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a view illustrating a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various kinds. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When the "big hit" in the special symbol game or the "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

  In addition, in various winnings, a special symbol start winning prize, which is one condition for performing a special symbol variable display in a special symbol game, and one condition for performing a normal symbol variable display in a normal symbol game. It also includes certain regular symbol starting prizes.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

  (1) When a special symbol starting prize is won in the special symbol game, various random numbers (for example, a random number for a jackpot determination and a random number for a symbol determination) are read from various counters (for example, a jackpot determination counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and the extracted random numbers are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 9).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol starting prize, and the change display of the special symbols is performed on the condition that various data such as random numbers are stored as one condition. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

  Next, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, the big hit determination random number value extracted from the big hit determination counter is referred to, and a big hit determination as to whether or not the big hit is made is performed. Thereafter, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern (variable display pattern) is referred to. ).

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the special symbol change display is determined.

  Next, as a result of the determined big hit determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. An effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that "big hit" has been reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of the various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, the big hit gaming state control process is not executed.

  If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or if the big hit game state control processing has been completed, a game state shift control processing for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control processing, management of a normal game state different from the big hit game state is performed.

  As the gaming state at the time of normal, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a gaming state determined as “big hit” with a predetermined probability (hereinafter, referred to as “normal gaming state”) or a probability determined as “big hit” A game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability game state”) that is greater than a normal game state, or a game state in which a special symbol starting prize is easily obtained as a result of a normal hit determination described below (hereinafter, referred to as a “time reduction game state”). ). After that, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins during a special symbol fluctuating display, various data extracted at the time of the start winning (a random number value for a jackpot determination, a random number value for a symbol determination, etc.). ) Are stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. As described above, storing various data (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit) until the condition for starting the change display of the special symbol is satisfied is referred to as “holding”, and the various data to be held is referred to as start storage.

  That is, when the game ball wins during the special symbol change display, the execution of the special symbol change display corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and is suspended after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The fluctuation display of the special symbols is started in order. Hereinafter, various data on the reserved special symbols are also referred to as “reserved balls”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first and second starting opening prizes) are provided, and up to four special symbol starting prizes are provided for each special symbol starting prize. Until the execution of the special symbol change display can be suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a maximum of eight in total of four first special symbols and four second special symbols.

  Although not shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines a hit of a reserved ball (whether or not a “big hit” has been won) based on the information of the reserved ball described above. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

  (2) When a normal symbol start prize is won in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter and the random value is stored (the normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 9). Refer to the winning process flow).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol starting prize, and assuming that the random number value is stored as one condition, the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

  Next, when starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the “normal hit” is set. Thereafter, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this processing, the result of the ordinary hit determination is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, the result of the determined normal hit determination and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process of controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process of performing a predetermined effect are executed. .

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not “normal hit” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that "normal hit" is achieved, a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

  In the normal winning game control processing, the possibility of the various winnings described above, especially the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not become "normal hit", the normal hit game control processing is not executed. Thereafter, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described normal symbol control process are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a “big hit” is obtained in the special symbol game, a transition state of the gaming state, and whether or not the “simple hit” is generated in the normal symbol game. The ease with which the control process is performed changes.

  In the present embodiment, as a method of extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method in which a random number value is generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals, a random number value is counted from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. May be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random numbers.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Display]
[3-1. Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of liquid crystal, and performs various effect displays in its display area.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to (corresponding to) a special symbol displayed on a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) described later is displayed in the display area. Will be displayed. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) in a variable manner, for example, 1 to 8 except for a specific case. A plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) including numbers, various characters, and the like are variably displayed in the display area.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74), a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. You.

  When the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"). An effect image for letting the player know that the "big hit" is displayed in the display area.

  As an effect for causing the player to recognize that it is a “big hit”, for example, first, a plurality of stopped and displayed decorative symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect of displaying an image for notifying “big hit” is given.

  In the present embodiment, an effect image related to display contents of a first special symbol hold display section 75 and a second special symbol hold display section 76 described later is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, in the display area, holding information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holdings) for notifying the number of holdings (starting storage numbers) of the special symbol change display is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect is performed based on the information on the special designating ball, and a notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 71 described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A function for displaying may be further provided.

[3-2. Special symbol display section]
The special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) are arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) is a display device that variably displays the special symbols in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, a special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays a special symbol as a symbol or a symbol.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern formed by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (special symbol starting prize). , The special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) perform the special symbol change display for a predetermined time, and then perform the stop display of the special symbol.

  Hereinafter, a special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, a special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) is in a specific mode ("big hit" mode). In, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state, which is a state advantageous to the player.

  That is, in the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit game state. "Big hit".

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening 53 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting port 420, and the first special symbol is specified on the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74). When the stop display is performed in the manner described above, the special winning opening 53 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening that has been open is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the special winning opening 53 is in a state (open state) where game balls can be easily received is referred to as a round game. During the round games, the winning port is closed.

  The round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round. In each round game, the special winning opening 540 is determined when the count of the game balls winning the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls or when the open time reaches 30 sec. When it is satisfied, it is in the closed state.

  In the special symbol display sections (the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74), when the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode (the mode of “losing”). The game state does not shift except when the lottery is won.

  That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbols are displayed by the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed. This is a game in which the state is shifted or maintained.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 during the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is achieved. The display (holding ball) is held.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be retained (so-called “reserved number (number of retained balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (reserved ball). Is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of the variable displays of the second special symbols to be retained (the number of retained symbols) is defined to be a maximum of four times (number). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the total number of suspended special symbol display changes is a maximum of eight.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the special symbol may be changed and displayed in the order in which the reserved balls are retained.

[3-3. Normal design display section]
The normal symbol display section 71 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display unit 71 is disposed on the left side of the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays a normal symbol in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 includes a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). Then, in the ordinary symbol display section 71, a display pattern formed by turning on / off each of the ordinary symbol display LEDs is represented as an ordinary symbol.

  The ordinary symbol display section 71 alternately turns on and off the two ordinary symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 4), and performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  In the normal symbol display section 71, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("normal hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stop-displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display section 71, and thereafter the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 (for example, see FIG. 4) during the normal symbol change display, the normal symbol change display is suspended. Then, when the ordinary symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the suspended ordinary symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the ordinary symbols to be retained (that is, the “reserved number”) is defined to be a maximum of four times.

[3-4. Ordinary symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol holding display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of held normal display variable display, the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 By turning on / off each of the ordinary symbol holding display LEDs, the number of ordinary symbols to be changed is displayed.

  More specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays a normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of held normal display variable display, and the normal symbol hold display LED corresponds to the number of held normal display variable display. Up to four lights.

[3-5. 1st special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol hold display section 75 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The first special symbol holding display section 75 is a device that displays information on the variable display of the held first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display section 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold display section 75 displays the first special symbol hold display LED in accordance with the number of held variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display LED. A maximum of four lights are turned on in accordance with the number of suspended special symbols.

[3-6. 2nd special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display section 76 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The second special symbol holding display section 76 is a device that displays information on the variable display of the held second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol), and the second special symbol holding display section 76 includes: , A plurality of second special symbol holding display LEDs.

  Specifically, the second special symbol hold display section 76 displays a second special symbol hold display LED in accordance with the number of held variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED displays the second special symbol hold display LED. 2. Up to four lights are turned on according to the number of suspended special symbols.

[3-7. Performance display monitor]
The performance display monitor 334 displays performance display data under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the jackpot game state to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also referred to as a base value.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 totals the base value based on the past game history, and stores the totaled result in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even when a backup clear process described later is performed. It should be noted that the totaling of the base values may be performed based on a predetermined operation being performed, or the totaling may be always performed and the base value may be constantly displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes: all history totaling means for totalizing all base values based on all game histories from the initial power-on (first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present; A set value-based history tallying means for executing tallying of set value-based base values based on past game histories for each set value.

  For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of the above all base values. All the base values totalized by the all history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. When the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history tallying means executes the tally of the set value-based base values. The set value-based base values totaled by the set value-based history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  The set value-based history tallying means can also tally only a base value for an arbitrary set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set value that has been set, but also the base value for another set value other than the set value can be totaled. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base value of another set value on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

  In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in response to an operation by a gaming machine manager or the like, both the total base value totalized by the total history totalizing means and the set value-specific base value totalized by the set value-specific history totaling means. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

  Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of the specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Alternatively, both the total base value and the set value-specific base values may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list or displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, the performance display monitor 334 and both other display means are used. It may be displayed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totalizing unit and a set value-specific history totalizing unit. A post-setting change history summarizing means for summing up the post-setting change base value based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

  In this way, by displaying all or a part of the entire base value and the set value-based base value and / or the set value-based base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game is performed. It is possible to easily confirm information based on past game history in the machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric auditorium (large winning prize port) or an ordinary electric auditorium. You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by the accessory). In addition, it may be a display for the total number of shots, or may be a display for a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors (large winning opening). They may be displayed for each setting.

[3-8. Error notification monitor]
The error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process described below is being performed, a setting checking code indicating that a setting check process is being described later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[4. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table stored in the main ROM 102. As shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

  Before describing the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 10, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

  When detecting the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 4), the main CPU 101 extracts the first special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter, and stores the random number in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a "big hit determination of the first special symbol") is performed on the extracted random numbers for big hit determination. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the big hit game state is controlled.

  Similarly, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 4), the main CPU 101 extracts the second special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “big hit determination of the second special symbol”) for the extracted random number for big hit determination is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

  When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be one of “big hit” and “losing” as in the big hit determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is stored in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ), The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be “big hit” or “losing” and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data” and “losing determination value data”) Is stipulated.

  In this embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

  The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”.

  The time reduction flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is “non-time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “0”. In the time saving game state, the number of time savings is also managed by the main CPU 101, and each time the special symbol fluctuates once, the number of time savings is decremented by one.

  In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (normal hit probability) is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of the ordinary electric auditors goods 46 changing from the closed state to the opening state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, in the time-saving gaming state, instead of increasing the normal winning probability as compared with the non-hours-saving gaming state, for example, by increasing the frequency of executing the normal winning lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric winning combination The frequency at which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the normal electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three of the above three aspects may be combined.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal game state in which both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the probable change time short game state in which the probable change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the time reduction game in which the probable change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 in one of the game states.

  When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 4) and extracts a big hit determination random number of the first special symbol, the extracted big hit determination randomness of the extracted first special symbol. The numerical value is held as the start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the first special symbol, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 4) and extracts the random number for the big hit determination of the second special symbol, the extracted big hit determination randomness of the second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the change display of the second special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the second special symbol, a big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[4-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 10, in the big hit determination of the first special symbol, the big hit probability is different depending on the set value set. In a low-probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is relatively low (probable change flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 in setting 1, about 1/290 in setting 2, and about 1/290 in setting 3. The setting is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 1/260, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. When the game state is the high-probability game state (probable change flag ON) in which the big hit probability is relatively high, the big hit probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and 3 in setting 2. The setting is about 1/28, the setting 4 is about 27/27, the setting 5 is about 1/26, and the setting 6 is about 25/25.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, since the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set to the set value. By changing the probability according to the set value, the big hit probability is changed. For example, in the low-probability gaming state of the first special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits is 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It has become.

  Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the gaming state is a low-probability game state (probability change flag OFF) in which the jackpot probability is relatively low, the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, and 280 minutes in setting 3. 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In the high-probability gaming state (probable change flag ON) in which the jackpot probability is relatively high, the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. The setting is 1/1, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

  That is, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is also changed according to the set value by changing the number of the big hit determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits is 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of the big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is also 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It is individual.

  Note that the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if the setting is 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability gaming state (1/28 in the high-probability gaming state), and the jackpot probability is the second special symbol. Is the same as the big hit probability in the big hit determination (1/280 in the low-probability game state, and 1/28 in the high-probability game state).

  In the present embodiment, the setting value is in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value is not necessarily required to be six, and can be arbitrarily determined as long as there are a plurality of steps.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the big hit probability is different when the set value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common big hit probability may be set with a plurality of set values. For example, a common jackpot probability (first probability) is set for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability) is set for setting 3 and setting 4, and a setting 5 The common jackpot probability (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set to be common to setting 6.

  In the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535. By changing the number of the jackpot determination value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is varied for each set value. However, the technique for varying the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this. By setting the number of data common to all the settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as the total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be varied according to the set value. For example, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 218 common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in the setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in the setting 2 The range of 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range of 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability of 1/280), the range of 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability of 1/270) Setting 5 is in the range of 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 is in the range of 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. In addition, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the jackpot determination random number) having more digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Compared with a method in which the range is a fixed value and the number of the big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value, the big hit probability for each set value can be set finely.

  In the above description, the number of the big hit determination value data is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value. It is not essential that they be common. For example, in setting 1, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in a range of 0 to 65535 (the big hit probability is about 1/300). 219, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of jackpot determination value data is 220 and the random number for jackpot determination is The range (width) is in the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280). In setting 4, the number (221) of the jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination are in the range of 0 to 59669. (The big hit probability is about 1/270). In the setting 5, the number of the big hit determination value data is 222 pieces, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in a range of 0 to 57719 (the big hit probability is about 1/260). And in setting 6 , The number of the jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even when both the range (width) is changed according to the set value, the set value is compared with the method in which the range of the random number for the big hit determination is fixed and the number of the big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  When the main CPU 101 changes the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination as the total random number according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process of step S74 or step S82 described later (see FIG. 30). ), In addition to or instead of determining whether or not the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”, for example, a range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is set. It may be checked whether or not the value is within a range according to the value, and / or whether or not the number of the big hit determination value data is a number specified in the set value. If it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number and / or the number of the jackpot determination value data is out of the range corresponding to the set value) (step described later) If it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[4-2. Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of the big hit distribution when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, that is, a selection rate of a stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all the settings. Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 11 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 determines the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random numbers, as shown in FIG. 25.0%), Toku-zu 1-2 (allocation probability 25.0%), Toku-zu 1-3 (allocation probability 25.0%), and Toku-zu 18 (allocation probability 25.0%) Decide on one of them. The special chart 1-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds being 4, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of time savings being 100. In FIG. 1-2, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started). It is a big hit. The special chart 1-3 is a big hit with the number of rounds being 10, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of time savings being 100. The special figure 18 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probable change flag is turned ON as in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4). This is a so-called “probable loop machine” in which the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big-hit gaming state starts after the big-hit gaming state ends. In such a probability changing loop machine, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends, and then the next big hit game state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played. Then, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability gaming state is a big hit and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, as shown in the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3, the probability change flag If it is a big hit that does not turn ON), after the big hit game state ends, the game is controlled not to the high probability game state but to the low probability game state.

  When the big hit determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determining random numbers in the special symbol 21 (allocation probability 50.0%) or the special symbol 22 ( (The distribution probability is 50.0%). The special map 21 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time savings. The special map 22 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the second special symbol for a fluctuating time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a loss symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol at the determined loss symbol.

  The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled to a high probability game state (game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the big hit game state is set. Is controlled to a low-probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the probable change flag is set to OFF). Hereinafter, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is OFF, and the big hit of 100 times (for example, the big hit in Tokuju 1-1) is called “4R normal big hit”, and the number of rounds, the certain change flag is ON, and the next big hit game is A jackpot whose time saving continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1-2) is called a “4R probability changing jackpot”, and has a number of rounds of 10, a probability changing flag OFF, and a jackpot of 100 times-saving times (eg, Toku-zu 1-). 3, the big hit of the special map 21 is called “10R normal big hit”, and the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the big hit whose time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed (for example, the special map 18 and the special map 22). Jackpot) is referred to as "10R probability variable jackpot".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is determined based on the extracted symbol determining random numbers. Whether the time reduction flag is set to ON or OFF may be determined according to the main symbol to be performed.

[4-3. Special design fluctuation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a flow until the change time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 4) by the sub control circuit 200 (the sub CPU 201). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the determined special pattern variation pattern (that is, the variation time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation decreases as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 12, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol big hit determination and the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol big hit determination. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table includes a special symbol big hit determination result, a game state, a reach determination random number range, a main symbol when the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit, and an effect selection. It defines the relationship among the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents. However, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the probability-variable time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not distinguished. Also, different random number ranges are set for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the special symbol fluctuation time.

  The reach determination random number range is a random number that is used to determine whether or not to perform a reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter when a game ball has won a first start port 420 or a second start port 440 (both shown in FIG. 4 for example), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number when starting the special symbol change display. When the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 stores the big hit determination in the main RAM 103. Using the reach determination random number, it is determined whether or not a reach effect is to be executed. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 in the settings 1.2. The setting is set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and is set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is set to 1. 2 is defined as 0 to 10, setting 3 and 4 is defined as 0 to 11, and setting 5.6 is defined as 0 to 12.

  As described above, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2; Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to perform the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 5 and the setting 5. 6, but is not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is for the case where the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. However, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 Determines that the reach effect is to be executed regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

  The effect selection random number range is a random number used for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts an effect selection random number from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins at the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (both shown in, for example, FIG. 4), and selects the extracted effect selection. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines an effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 in accordance with a game state and a result of determining whether or not to execute a reach effect (only when a result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss). Is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state.

  Specifically, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed is: It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 59 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Is determined. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal fluctuation A) is set to 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal fluctuation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 59 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during the working hours) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (short variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened fluctuation B) is defined in the range of 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  In addition, since the main symbol is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, when the special symbol big hit determination result is a loss, the determination of the change time of the special symbol is not involved.

  The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag OFF and the time saving flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium normal reach) is set to 0 to 1 in settings 1.2 and 0 to 2 in settings 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normal medium super reach A) is set to 2 to 49 in setting 1.2, and to 3 to 49 in setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time saving game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a special symbol variation time, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is set to 0 to 1 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 2 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is set to 2 to 49 in settings 1.2 and 3 to 49 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during working hours) is set to 50 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, and the result of the determination as to whether to execute the reach effect are the same, the fluctuation time of the special symbol In the setting, the setting 3 and 4 are more easily determined to have a shorter fluctuation time than the setting 1 and 2, and the setting 5.6 is more easily determined to be a shorter fluctuation time than the setting 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the more the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (ie, the number of lotteries). Eventually, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game state when viewed in the unit time is high, and the probability that the big hit game state is executed in the unit time is also high. An advantageous game can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the effect selection random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 5 and the setting 6. Although common, it is not limited to this, and may be different for all set values.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit is determined commonly for all the main symbols, but is not limited to this, and the special symbol is changed according to the main symbol. May be configured to vary.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” indicates the normal medium super reach B having a fluctuation time of 40000 msec.

  The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, a fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[4-4. Stop pattern of decorative pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, an example of a stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined at the selection rate shown in FIG. 11 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit will be described. . The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  When receiving the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) changes the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command, regardless of the set value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special symbol 1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same as the specific symbol (for example, “7” symbol). Since the distribution probability of the aspect is 0%, all the decoration symbols (three decoration symbols in the present embodiment) are the same even symbol (the distribution probability is 30.0%), or all the decorations The pattern is determined so that the symbols become the same odd symbols (allocation probability: 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is a “7” symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the player can recognize a big hit with a high degree of profit from the player, another symbol (for example, a “V” symbol) is set as the specific symbol. Is also good.

  As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 13 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 13 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, FIG. Are determined as the stop symbols of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 13 correspond to, for example, symbols in which at least one of the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

  As described above, according to FIG. 13, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is determined to be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol big hit determination. Whether the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state, and whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

  That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 11 is the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, or the special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit where the probable change flag is not set ON), Regardless of the set value, the operation always stops in a mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “first mode”) in which all decorative symbols are the same even-numbered symbols.

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-2 (4R probable big hit), regardless of the set value, the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (other than the "7" symbol which is the specific symbol). (Odd number symbol) (hereinafter referred to as “second mode”).

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-4 (10R probability variable hit), regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, or all the decorative symbols have the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as a “specific mode”).

  Furthermore, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the operation is stopped in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Toku-zu 1-4 and Toku-zu 2-2 have a 10R probability variable jackpot, but since Toku-zu 1-4 is a jackpot based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420, the jackpot in the normal gaming state It is highly likely that he was won. In addition, since the special map 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, there is a high possibility that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state.

  In this manner, when stopping in a specific mode, the 10R certain jackpot with the greatest profit for the player is determined, and when stopping in a mode in which all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, a certain jackpot (4R certain jackpot or 10R jackpot) is obtained. (Variable jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, in the case of stopping in the first mode, although it is determined that the 10R certainty-win is not the largest for the player, the possibility of the 4R certainty-win is left.

  If the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all the decorative symbols have stopped, or the jackpot game The notification may be performed during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the big hit gaming state ends. Although not employed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even though the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends is the big hit controlled to the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state May be controlled to a so-called “latent probability change state” in which the control is not explicitly indicated to the player.

[5. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Although the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, the present invention is not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, the following description is an example, and it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this.

[5-1. Variation of special symbol fluctuation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of a modification of the change time of the special symbol (that is, the change pattern of the special symbol). FIG. 14 is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol fluctuation time determination table stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, as described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

  In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 14 has a lottery number for counting the number of times the number of times the special symbol changes (that is, the number of special symbol lotteries). A counting means (not shown) is provided. This lottery number counting means resets, for example, at the start of the big hit game state, and starts counting the number of times the special symbol has changed starting from the end of the big hit game state.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in another example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probable change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect is made. This is performed in accordance with both the number of times the special symbol has been changed counted from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends and the set value.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol has changed from a specific point in time (for example, the point at which the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000, a reach determination random number range in which it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed is determined. Are set to 0 to 25 in the setting 1.2, set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. These are the same as FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. Are set to 0 to 5 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 1 in the settings 5.6. That is, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the setting 1.2 as compared to the setting 3.4, and compared to the setting 5.6 in the setting 3.4. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 in the setting 1.2 and the setting 5.6).

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times In comparison with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed, the special symbol change time is also changed. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach). Are set to 0 to 57 in settings 1.2 and 0 to 58 in settings 3.4 and 0 to 59 in settings 5.6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common. These are the same as FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the change time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 1 No. to 4 are not specified, and settings 5 and 6 are set to 0 to 99. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4 and is not defined in settings 5 and 6. . Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normal medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 4, and is specified in the settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called large-added situation in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends is 1001 or more, the set value is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

  If the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed, the point at which the big hit game state ends is determined as the starting point. If the number of times the special symbol changes is 1001 or more, the higher the set value is, the lower the execution probability of the reach effect is. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of execution of the reach effect that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short.

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state becomes 1001 times or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the change time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of times the special symbol changes per time (that is, the number of lotteries) is further increased. Eventually, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game as seen in the unit time increases will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed in the unit time will be higher.

  When the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the jackpot gaming state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot gaming state When the number of times of the change of the special symbol from the end of the game becomes 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect is remarkably different according to the set value. There can be room to do it. With this, when a so-called "big hit" occurs, the set value set for the player can be changed without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). Providing an opportunity that can be guessed makes it possible to give the player pleasure. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player thinks that the reach effect should normally be achieved, the present embodiment expects that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value is, the higher the set value is. Since the player can embrace, even if the frequency of execution of the reach effect is low, the willingness to continue the game can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of times of the change of the special symbol is counted is the time when the big hit gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high probability gaming state becomes An arbitrary point can be set as the starting point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends or the time-saving gaming state ends in a pachinko machine called a so-called ST machine that ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value. It need not be more than one time. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number, as long as the player feels that the player is absorbed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time becomes equal to or more than the specified number of times, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value. Is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter, referred to as “opening time”) between the time when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot and the time when the control is actually performed to the jackpot gaming state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) between the end of the big hit game state and the start of the display of the change of the special symbol. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production that indicates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production that congratulates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method (for example, right-handed) in the big hit game state An effect to teach is performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state, an effect indicating the number of times the jackpot game state is continued (the number of extended play), and a game state after the jackpot game state ends with a high probability game An effect that indicates that the state is controlled, an effect that teaches a game method (for example, returning to left-handed) in the game state after the big hit game state is completed, and an effect that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc. are performed.

  Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the big hit game state increases as the set value increases. Can be shorter. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times the special symbol changes per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the expected value of a ball is higher as the set value is higher (for example, the probability of a big hit is higher as the set value is higher), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the lower set value. In view of the possibility that the setting may be made, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value with a higher expected value of the ball, the longer the total time or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time, thereby ensuring the interest of the game with the high set value. In addition, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

  It should be noted that the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is won to the starting opening (the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, the ending time, and the big hitting game state are controlled. Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and a setting check process (see FIG. 30) in step S74 or step S82 described later is executed. If it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[5-2. Variation example of stop design of big hit distribution and decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15 to FIG. 17, a first modified example and a second modified example of the big hit distribution (main symbol selection rate) when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, The stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selectivity of the main symbol differs according to the set value. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a case where the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol of FIG. FIG. 17 is an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, which is commonly used in the first modified example and the second modified example.

[5-2-1. First Modification]
First, the first modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 15 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the first modified example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determination random number in accordance with the set value. By probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5%) with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4. %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In the setting 6, the main symbols are set as the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  That is, in the special maps 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) (higher in setting 1 to 4).

  Similarly, in Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both of which are 10R probability-variable jackpots) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0% and 20.0% in setting 6) are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (For example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30.000 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 17, the sub CPU 201 sets the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7. , Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3 (4R ordinary jackpot or 10R ordinary jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special pattern 1-4 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75) regardless of the set value. 0.0%). Here, at a high set value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, despite the fact that the special map 1-2 and the special map 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. When the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. (0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high set value is lower than the low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

  Further, similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop. In addition, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% at setting 5 and 10.0% at setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than that of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is smaller than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  In this way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the decoration pattern stop mode can be different depending on the set value even if the big hit type is the same. Become. In particular, when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 or 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variable big hit) is the same when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Become.

[5-2-2. Second Modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  In the first modified example, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a certainty change attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 4). And, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the entry of the game ball to the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the big hit game state is ended is controlled to the high probability game state, and to the probability change attacker When the big hit game state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to the low probability game state. As described above, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability game state based on the entry of a game ball into a probable variable attacker is also a so-called “probable loop machine”.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the second modified example, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probable change attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special map 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the big hit game state is formed in a mode in which the game ball easily enters the probability change attacker. Is controlled. In the present embodiment, the number of times reduced in the case of a big hit in the “mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is difficult” is 100 times, and the “mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is easy”. If it is a big hit, the time reduction continues until the next big hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the “mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker” is equivalent to almost no possibility that the game ball enters the probable attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). Is controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to. In addition, the “mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker” means that the hit ball is in the jackpot game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probable attacker (for example, the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 4 for example)). This is a mode in which a game ball almost enters a probability change attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high-probability game state with a probability close to almost 100%). Therefore, in the second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable change attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and the "mode in which the game ball easily enters the probable change attacker". The big hit is called a "probable big hit".

  However, if it is “an aspect in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker”, the game state is controlled to the high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%. Instead of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when the “mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is easy”, “the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker” A mode in which the game state is controlled to the high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode” may be adopted.

  As a method of creating a mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter into a probable change attacker and an easy mode, for example, apart from a special winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 4) having a probabilistic attacker inside, no probabilistic attacker is provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2) -4), it is controlled to the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, and it is difficult to enter the game ball into the certainty changing attacker (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 1) -5, Toku-zu 1-7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3), by controlling to the big hit game state in which the other big-winning openings are opened without opening the big winning opening 540, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as long as it is possible to create an embodiment in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable attacker and an easy embodiment.

  Further, as described above, when the special winning opening 540 provided with the probability changing attacker inside and another special winning opening (not shown) not provided with the certainty changing attacker are provided, the large winning opening opened in the big hit game state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at the low setting value such as the setting 1, the big hit game state in which the other big winning opening is opened more easily than the big winning opening 540, and at the high setting value such as the setting 6, the larger winning opening is more than the other big winning opening. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, such that the big winning game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is easily selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the second modification, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random number and sets the main symbol to the set value. With the probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, One of the special figures 1-8 is determined. However, in the second modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5%) with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4. %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In the setting 6, the main symbols are set as the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  That is, in the special maps 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) (higher in setting 1 to 4).

  Similarly, in Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both of which are 10R probability-variable jackpots) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0% and 20.0% in setting 6) are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (For example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30.000 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 17, the sub CPU 201 sets the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7. , Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3 (4R ordinary jackpot or 10R ordinary jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special pattern 1-4 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75) regardless of the set value. 0.0%). Here, at a high set value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, despite the fact that the special map 1-2 and the special map 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. When the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. (0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high set value is lower than the low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

  Further, similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop. In addition, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% at setting 5 and 10.0% at setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than that of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is smaller than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  As described above, in the second modified example, similarly to the first modified example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, even if the big hit type is the same, decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make it possible to change the stop mode of the symbol. In particular, when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 or 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variable big hit) is the same when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Become.

  In each of the first and second modifications, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value by changing the selectivity of the main symbol according to the set value. are doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol according to the set value. Stop symbols can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control by the sub CPU 201 may be configured so that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value.

  According to the above-described first and second modifications, providing a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, providing a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability change entry rate, and the time reduction entry rate. It becomes possible.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (the description of the processing in the main CPU 101), the terms of the power switch 35, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the performance display monitor 334, the error notification monitor 336, the external terminal board 323, and the hall computer 700 are used. But these are shown in FIG.

[6-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. For example, when the person in charge of the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 executes a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to a set value (step S20), and a game return process (step S20). S30) are sequentially executed. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. If the voltage drops to a predetermined level when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 35 is turned off, etc. The processing at the time of occurrence of power interruption described later is performed.

[6-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to a stack pointer, as shown in the figure (step S11).

  Next, after permitting access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), the main CPU 101 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 101 activates a switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the setting value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are included. Equivalent to. After activating the switches related to the setting (step S15), the main CPU 101 performs a reading process of each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 19), a game permission flag for permitting execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . Hereinafter, the game permission process (step S17) will be described.

  The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power-off state identification flag is a flag for identifying the state at the time of the previous power-off occurrence. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later or the like, it is highly likely that the power failure has occurred before the setting change process is properly completed. Can not do it. Thus, when the power is turned on, it is possible to identify the situation at the time of the previous power failure. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power failure occurs. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF before the power failure. Also, when a power failure occurs during the abnormal time processing described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. Note that the power-off status identification flag is OFF when the power is not turned on yet, or when data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long time. In addition, the above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and means a normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF. Not (the same below).

  In step S1710, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1720 if the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and the game permission flag if the power-off state identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710). Is set to OFF (step S1750), and then the process moves to step S1720.

  In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The checking of the work area includes checking whether the set value data set is within a prescribed range (in the present embodiment, within a range of “0” to “5”).

  The work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed, and a data without being cleared in principle even when a backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set value data set, and the like are stored. This is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of “0” to “5” correspond to each of the set values “1” to “6” of the six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is “4”, the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”.

  In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal. If the work area is normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740, and if not, ie, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

  In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process ends. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process moves to step S1770.

  In step S1770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power has been turned on while the setting key 328 has been turned ON (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 has been performed), that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal has been turned ON. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

  In step S1780, main CPU 101 determines whether or not backup clear switch 330 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Then, the process proceeds to step S1790. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

  In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

  As described above, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740) due to the situation at the time of the last power interruption or the abnormal working area of the main RAM 103 (NO in step S1740), the main CPU 101 sets the setting key switch signal ON ( If YES in step S1770 and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the game permission flag is turned ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

  In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and ends the game permission processing. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not a backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON, and when the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

  In step S1810, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of a game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the process in step S1810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission process. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hole confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and is not in a state in which the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF). ) Can be understood. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, only when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key switch 328 is ON, the game permission flag is set. Can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is performed to temporarily stop the supply of power, and the game permission flag does not turn ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Note that, in the above description, the game permission process ends when the process of step S1810 is performed. Alternatively, the process returns to step S1740 after performing the process of step S1810, and sets a condition that the game permission flag is turned on. (In FIG. 20, until it is determined to be YES in step S1780), the processing of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[6-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting process. In the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 18), a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed according to the operation status of the operation of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Hereinafter, the setting process will be described.

  First, in step S21, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S22. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of the steps S26).

  When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S24), and turns ON the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), a setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

  If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28), and performs a setting change process (step S28). S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) are not executed, and the setting processing ends. When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) are not executed).

[6-1-2-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 21) is a process for changing the set value that has been set. However, the setting change process may be ended with the same set value as the set value. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power cut operation is performed to temporarily stop the supply of power and then execute the setting change process.

  First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 20). Therefore, a setting change process is executed.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes a backup clear process. This backup clear processing will be described later.

  After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and proceeds to step S2440. Note that the backup clearing process may be executed at any timing as long as the period from the start of the setting change process to the end thereof.

  In step S2440, main CPU 101 performs output setting of a setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting change security signal is output for a predetermined time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2450, main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into a set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the set value “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, it is not always necessary to display a number on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are respectively associated with “A” to “F”, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, “3”, the corresponding “D” May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the performance display monitor 334 converts the set value data stored in the register into a set value and displays the set value. The set initial value (for example, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, “1”) or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, “8”) on the performance display monitor. 334 may be displayed. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

  In step S2460, main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on error notification monitor 336. Accordingly, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2470, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2510.

  In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 has been pressed. If the setting switch 332 has been pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520, where the setting value stored in the register is set. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step S2520). (The processing from S2440 to step S2470 is repeated.)

  When the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 performs notification setting in step S2450 so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  Unless the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 changes the setting value data stored in the register from “0” to “5” every time the setting switch 332 is pressed. (Returns to “0” when the setting switch 332 is pressed while the setting value data is “5”). Thus, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be circulated and reduced from “5” to “0”, or the circulating increase and the cycling may be performed depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. You may make it possible to perform both of the reduction.

  In step S2470, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), main CPU 101 shifts to step S2480. In Step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of Step S2510, Step S2520, and Steps S2440 to S2470.

  In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is performed, the set value is determined. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is determined based on the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determination of YES in step S2470), and the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal is performed. If the setting switch 332 is only depressed without executing (the step S2510, the step S2520, and the steps S2440 to S2470 are simply looped), only the setting value data stored in the register is updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

  After the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), even if the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35) is performed. At this time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again), the main CPU 101 sets the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At this time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may set the game permission flag to OFF until the setting key switch signal is turned OFF.

  In step S2490, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S2500, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. The process ends.

  When the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 21) ends, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 18) ends, and the flow proceeds to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 18).

  Note that if the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 21) is executed, a certain period after the game is started, or At a predetermined timing after the is started, information indicating that the setting change process may have been performed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher set value, Information indicating that there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change processing, and the setting value has been changed in a plurality of steps by the setting change processing (for example, two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4 are changed). Information related to the setting change process, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed by the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or to set a higher set value by the setting change process. It may be different between when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, or it may be different when the setting value is changed more than one step by the setting change process and when it is not changed more than one step. May be.

  The output period of the setting change security signal and the period during which the setting change informing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

  Note that the above-described setting change process is a process that is internally executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF. Also, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in the step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in the step S2510, and when the process in the step S2480 is executed. Accordingly, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the lamp 25, and the like may notify that the setting is being changed, that the setting value is being changed, that the setting has been changed, and the like. Good.

[6-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the backup clear process in step S2420 (see FIG. 22). This backup clearing process is a process for clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in the backup clear processing, as described above, information stored in the general work area is cleared, but information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

  First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), the process proceeds to step S2422. Move on to

  In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred, In this backup clearing process, it may be only partially cleared.

  In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set value data set is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. You. When it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared. In this case, the game permission flag is turned off, and the game is permitted unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 22) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

  In step S2423, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. Thereafter, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear processing. The above notification setting is transmitted as a command to, for example, the sub-control circuit 200, and an image indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, by the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 8).

[6-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 21) is a process for confirming the set value that has been set. The set values that have been set are stored in the main RAM 103.

  First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and performs output setting of a setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting confirmation security signal is output for a fixed time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2630, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set value data set. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 as information indicating the set value.

  In step S2640, main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting confirmation processing is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2650, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the process of steps S2620 to S2650 is looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

  In step S2650, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), main CPU 101 shifts to step S2660. In step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processes in steps S2620 to S2650.

  In step S2660, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S2670, the main CPU 101 performs non-report setting so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. To end.

  When the setting confirmation processing in step S26 (see FIG. 21) ends, the setting processing in step S20 (see FIG. 18) ends, and the routine goes to the game return processing in step S30 (see FIG. 18).

[6-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 18), a process of returning to a state in which a game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. Hereinafter, the game return process will be described.

  First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

  When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32, and performs a process of validating all switches.

  In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is off. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

  In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON. If the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power-off state identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

  In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state.

  Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power-off recovery (power-off recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information on the set value that has been set. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 18), and ends a series of power-on processes. Thereby, execution of a game is attained.

  In step S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clearing process is the same as the backup clearing process of step S2420 shown in FIG. 22 (the backup clearing process shown in FIG. 23), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the backup clear processing in step S39 ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S40, and performs initialization of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 18), and ends a series of power-on processes. Thereby, execution of a game is attained.

  The output period of the setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

[6-1-3-1. Abnormal processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the abnormal time process. As described above, the abnormal process in step S38 (see FIG. 25) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S31) in the process in step S31 (see FIG. 25). Processing.

  First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub-control circuit 200 an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed. As a result, information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

  In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets output of an abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

  In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Accordingly, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hall can grasp that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF).

  In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is ON. The power interruption detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. If the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and processing at the time of power interruption occurrence is executed. On the other hand, when the power interruption detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[6-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. When the voltage has dropped to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs a process at the time of power failure occurrence.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S3851). Then, a checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, various game data stored in the main RAM 103 can be held even when the power supply is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power-off state identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption has occurred during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change processing, it is set to OFF.

  After finishing the processes in steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply.

  As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, as described above, the supply of power is temporarily stopped by performing a power interruption operation so that the game permission flag is not turned ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

  By the way, in this processing, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”) and the power outage occurrence processing is started, it is possible to return from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while processing is being performed normally, but is not updated when processing starts when a power failure occurs. As a result, the process starts when a power failure occurs due to a momentary power failure. Even if the process enters the infinite loop in FIG. 27, the reset is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main CPU 101 starts up in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that a regular power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is turned off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the save data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processes is reduced.

[6-1-4. Flow of power-on processing as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. The flow of the power-on process viewed from a person who performs an operation (for example, a person related to a hall) will be briefly described.

[6-1-4-1. Setting change processing flow]
First, a setting change process, that is, a flow for changing a set value that has been set will be described. In order to change the set value, it is necessary to first perform a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, while the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and the operation of turning on the power switch 35 are performed.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is disabled, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) is activated, and the setting change is performed. The process is started, and the setting can be changed.

  When the setting change process is started, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for initializing the RWM When the transmission is performed, the fact that the backup process has been performed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is circulated and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by one each time the set switch 332 is pressed when the set value is “1” to “5”, but when the set value is “6”, the set switch 332 is set. Pressing returns to "1" and is displayed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting change process, the setting change state ends, and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is validated.

  As described above, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. . When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[6-1-4-2. Setting confirmation process flow]
Next, a setting confirmation process, that is, a flow for confirming the set value that has been set will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is internally executed on condition that the game permission flag is ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

  In order to confirm the set value that has been set, on condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, the setting key 328 is turned ON while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 The ON operation of the power switch 35 is performed without pressing the.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, only the operation of the setting key 328 among all switches is enabled, the setting check process is started, and the set settings can be checked. Becomes

  When the setting confirmation processing is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation processing is being performed is displayed on the notification monitor. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  During the setting confirmation process, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change even if the setting switch 332 is pressed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Is displayed and the operation of all switches is enabled.

  As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 among all the switches is activated, and all the other switches remain inactivated. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains invalidated. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during a normal game, regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[6-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]

  As described above, when the game permission flag is internally ON, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally ON, the same operation as the above-described setting confirmation processing (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. If the power switch 35 is turned on without performing the above operation, an abnormal process is executed instead of the setting confirmation process. Hereinafter, the flow of the abnormal-time process will be described.

  After the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, and only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled (internal). Abnormal processing is started in general). The reason why the operation related to the setting is activated is to enable the game permission flag to be turned on by executing the setting change process.

  When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

  Furthermore, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, no operation is performed even if any operation is performed, and the pachinko game is set to a state in which the game can be executed unless the above-described setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all the switches is disabled in a situation in which a game in which all devices controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 are completely stopped cannot be played, and a device controlled by some of the sub-control circuits 200 (for example, Lamps) include those that are in a controllable state.

[6-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353). The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to a game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. You.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the saved values of the registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[6-2-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting opening winning detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning in the special winning opening 540 is set, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, a lottery result of the ordinary symbol game (based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (for example, see FIG. 4) by the ball passage detector (not shown)) Random value). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection processing.

[6-2-1-1. Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described switch input detection process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (step S71). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S52. When a game ball has not been detected by the first starting port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S81.

  In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later.

  In step S73, the main CPU 101 performs a process of extracting various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determining random number for the first special symbol, and setting payout information according to the first starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained first winning opening winnings (the number of retained special first symbols) is less than four (step S74). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S75. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the processing of step S80.

  In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held first winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until a change start condition (start condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Perform (Step S76). As a result, the display of the change of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, a large hit random number determination table, a symbol determination table, and a large hit type determination for the first special symbol are determined based on the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for symbol determination extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, a symbol designating command, a hit selection symbol command, and the like for a main symbol (a first special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start-up winning detection process. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table of FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14) and selects a variation pattern based on the hit determination result, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , To perform the determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 14, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination processing described above is stored. The pattern designation command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held first winning opening winnings (step S79). The first start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held special first symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a variation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

  In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a number-of-first-start-opening-winning-reserve-number-overflow command, and proceeds to step S81. The first start opening winning number overflow command is a command indicating that the first starting opening has been won when the number of first special symbols held is the upper limit (for example, four). Is sent.

  Note that, as is apparent from FIG. 30, the reason why the overflow command for the first start-up opening winning number is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check processing in step S72 described later. It is assumed that

  In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S82. If a game ball has not been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection processing.

  In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later, but is the same processing as step S72.

  In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second starting opening winnings (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S85. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, and ends the starting port winning detection process.

  In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (start condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Perform (Step S86). Thereby, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol big hit is determined. With reference to the random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the big hit type determination table, a symbol designating command, a big hit selection symbol command, and the like for a main symbol (a second special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination processing is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start-up winning detection processing, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). Then, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held second winning opening winnings (step S89). The second start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held second special symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the start-up winning detection process.

  If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are simultaneously detected, either of the setting check processing in step S72 and the setting check processing in step S82 is performed. Only one of them may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of retained second starting port winnings is four (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 does not transmit the command for overflowing the number of reserves for the second start-up port to the sub-control circuit 200, but discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start-up port 440 for starting. The winning detection processing has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[6-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check processing by the main CPU 101. This setting check processing is the same processing in step S72 and step S82 (both refer to FIG. 30). The setting check process is a process for checking whether the set value set is normal. In this setting check processing, for example, the same processing as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 20) may be performed. The emphasis is on checking for normality.

  As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the set value data corresponding to the set values “1” to “6”. It is determined whether it is within the range of “0” to “5”. If the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5” (YES in step S721), the setting check processing ends. When the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

  In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

  In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed (NO in step S723), the process proceeds to step S725.

  In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14), even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 30) has elapsed, The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

  For example, if a game ball wins in the starting ports 5442 and 440 while the special symbol is being displayed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the display of the special symbol (before the display of the variable of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process, even if the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the fluctuating display is not displayed). ), The game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is once turned off and the setting change processing is executed, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the fluctuation display is cleared in the backup clear processing including the data on hold. The Rukoto.

  In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, control is performed so that power is not supplied from the payout / firing control circuit (see FIG. 8) to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player grips the firing handle 32 and performs a turning operation in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired, and the game cannot be played.

  When prohibiting the launch of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to an abnormal time process in step S727.

  In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the change display of the special symbol, so that the next new change display is not started. For example, even if the special symbol change display is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the special symbol change display is stopped and the next variable display is waiting to be started, the special symbol change display is started. Not done. After ending the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S726.

  In the abnormal time process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 25). That is, the processing of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 26 is performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence in step S385, that is, FIG. The processing of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in FIG. 27 is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the stored set value data is not normal, execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is once turned off and turned on again to perform the setting change process, The game cannot be executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again even if the display of the change of the special symbol has not been started yet and has been suspended. Since the game cannot be executed unless the player inputs the setting and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, the random number for the jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data held is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 or based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various types of data related to the suspension from being processed based on abnormal setting values, and to enhance security.

  Further, as described above, the same processing is performed in the step S72 and the step S82 (both refer to FIG. 30) in the setting check processing. Therefore, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420, the main CPU 101 determines in step S724. Prohibits stopping the second special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S82) performed when a game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S1730 of FIG. 20) and at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S24 in FIG. 21), at the time of setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 21), at the time of executing backup clear processing (see FIG. 23), the fluctuation display of special symbols starts When the special symbol is stopped, the setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing, such as when the change of the special symbol is stopped, when the passage is detected by the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 8), when the change of the normal symbol is started, or when the change of the normal symbol is stopped. It may be performed. In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example listing. The setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the big hit game state. Although it is made possible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the setting value data is determined to be incorrect in the setting check processing may be shifted from the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to reduce a sense of loss of the player that can be caused by the fact that the fluctuation display is not performed even if the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various determination processes (for example, a big hit determination process or the like) in a state where the set value data is not normal, the special symbol variation display is performed for a predetermined time without performing the various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol with a loss.

  Although not shown in FIG. 31, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the stop of the ordinary symbol is also prohibited if the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. . Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[6-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S91). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S 93 and S 94. A process of storing control signals for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the ordinary symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits control signals to the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71, and the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the generated game state command in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probable change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[6-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in FIG. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read control state flag, whether or not to execute each of steps S102 to S110 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing related to another subroutine is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended symbols in the variable display of the special symbol, and if the number of symbols is not “0”. In the case where there is a reserved ball, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the determination of the main symbol, the result of the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like obtained in the starting opening winning detection processing are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the control pattern flag to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the current process. The variable display time of the corresponding special symbol is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol variation time management process described later is set to be executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, sets the control status flag to a special symbol described later. The value ("02") indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. That is, after the elapse of the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S103, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big hit is determined. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”. If the big hit determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval as the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a special symbol game ending process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit start interval management process (“03”), and that the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening process (step S106) described later, and sets the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special winning opening time timer. In other words, this process is set so that a process during opening of the special winning opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening process (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening process, the main CPU 101 sets a condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the later-described winning prize opening ball monitoring process (Step S107) in the control state flag, and sets the monitoring time of the remaining prize ball in the winning prize opening to a waiting time timer. I do. That is, by this processing, after the monitoring time of the remaining sphere in the special winning opening set in step S107 elapses, it is set so that the processing of monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening described later is executed. Immediately before the end of the special winning opening processing, a round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening (step S107). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“05”) indicating the processing for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening, and when the monitoring time for the remaining sphere in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times of opening the special winning opening counter. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval). Time) to the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (step S108). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening, and opens the special winning opening when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The value of the number-of-times counter is stored and updated so as to be increased by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the special winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer. That is, it is set such that the above-described opening processing of the special winning opening (step S106) is executed again in this processing. In addition, immediately before the end of the special winning opening waiting time management process, a special winning opening opening command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit end interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (“07”) indicating that the control state flag indicates the big hit end interval process and indicates the special symbol game end process (“07”) when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed. 08 ”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this processing, it is set so that the special symbol game ending processing described later is executed after the processing of step S109. In addition, when the above-mentioned main symbol is any of Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 18 and Toku-zu 22, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. When the symbol is any of the special map 1-1, the special map 1-3, and the special figure 21, control is performed to set the gaming state to the low-probability gaming state (probable change flag OFF).

  Next, when the big hit game state ends or when the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 updates the data (startup storage information) indicating the number of held items so as to decrease by “1”. I do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol change display. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S102) is executed after the process of step S110. When the special symbol game end processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the special symbol game end process (step S110). At a predetermined timing in this order.

  When the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the big hit determination result is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, and “03”. I do. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). At a predetermined timing in this order, and control to shift to the big hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing for opening the special winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the special winning opening (step S108) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state is executed.

  When the big hit game state end condition is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Thus, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107), the processing for ending the big hit (step S109), and the processing for ending the special symbol game (step S110). At the predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state ends.

  As described above, in the special symbol control processing, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 39 described later) in step S94 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 32, the process flow is branched according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

  The processing program according to the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[6-3-1-1. Special design memory check process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating a special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the second number of stored start-ups) of the second start-up winning (the display of the change of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is “0” (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is not “0”. If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

  In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the retained number (first stored number of memories) of the first starting opening winning (the change display of the first special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of the first starting opening winnings is not “0” (NO in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and determines that the number of the first starting opening winnings is “0”. When it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

  In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of first start opening winnings held. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the change display (holding ball) of the first four special symbols held four times. Is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the first opening 420, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first winning opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, reference value data is acquired with reference to a big hit determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start port. Then, based on the obtained determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “loss” (big hit determination).

  Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets a fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined in the fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S78 or step S88 (both shown in FIG. 30) in the waiting time timer. . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of held second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. In the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the change display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the second opening 440, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the winning of the second starting opening (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S117, executes the processes of steps S118 and S119, and ends the special symbol storage check process.

[6-3-2. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) after the variable display is set, which is set in the waiting time timer, has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S140.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S135.

  In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time-saving counter, the time-saving flag, and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S136.

  In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control status flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). Thereby, the big hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11, FIG. 15 or FIG. 16), and refers to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) for the number of rounds (the maximum winning opening opening number). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. This time reduction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end process to the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[6-3-2-1. Time saving subtraction processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes zero. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving counter in this embodiment is 100 or 10000.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S154. When the value of the time-saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving number subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “0” as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[6-3-2. Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end interval process by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value indicating the big hit end interval processing ("07") (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening frequency display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. If the special winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game ending process to the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a “big hit” (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability change big hit (step S168). If it is a probability change jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S169. If it is not a probability change jackpot (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the time saving flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of times saved in the number of times saved counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, referring to the big hit type determination table (FIG. 11, FIG. 15, or FIG. 16), when there is a big hit with 100 time saving times (Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 21) If the time saving counter is set to 100 times, and if the time saving is a big hit (Tokuzu 1-2, Toku 18 and Toku 22) until the next big hit gaming state is executed, 10000 times are set to the time saving counter. set. However, the time saving counter set when the time saving is a big hit in which the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall, The number may be any number that cannot actually occur. In this way, by setting the number of times that can not actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the store in the time saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed Will be done. Furthermore, when the hit is a big hit with 100 times savings, a counter process is performed (the time saving counter is set to 100 times), and when the hit is a big hit where the time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed, a flag process is performed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big hit flag, that is, a process of turning off the big hit flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

  In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

[6-3-2-1. Variation pattern table setting processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern table setting processing by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). If the power is on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S182. If the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). Table pattern 1 corresponds to a table pattern in the case where both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). .

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S184. If the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14).

  In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern in the case where the time reduction flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14).

[6-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the left of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 39 indicate a normal symbol control state flag. Is stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the ordinary symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the read value of the ordinary symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes in steps S192 to S196 described below. The normal symbol control state flag indicates a game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the suspended number of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and the retained number is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the later-described ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in this process. Set the wait time timer. That is, by the processing of step S192, after the determined fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to a value (“01”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process, and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol elapses, sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to be described later. The value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer. That is, in the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after the determination has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and that if the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, the big hit It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is “big hit”. If the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets a value (step S195) indicating a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. "03") is set. That is, the processing is set so as to execute the later-described ordinary electric accessory release processing. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit” in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 4) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process (step S196) in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game end process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol game end process (“04”), the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the number of suspended symbols in the variable symbol display by “1”. Is updated. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the ordinary symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the ordinary symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, it is set so that the above-described ordinary symbol storage check process (step S192) is executed after the process of step S196. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[7. Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main processing. The sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process performed by the sub CPU 201. The sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). In the watchdog timer, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set at the time of startup, and when a service pulse is not written (time-out), power interruption processing is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation unit input process (step S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining an effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set. The setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to first to third examples.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 4) exceeds the upper limit of holding. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first start winning port overflow point, and when the main control circuit 100 transmits the number-of-first-start-port winning reserve overflow command, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the first start winning port overflow point. I do. Then, when the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect in the above-described effect mode determination process. In a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as a normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win a game ball to the first starting port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning port overflow occurs, the player is not discouraged. . Therefore, by performing the setting suggestive effect on the condition that the first starting winning opening overflow has occurred in the non-time-saving game state, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player without giving a direct loss to the hole. It becomes possible. In addition, some of the players interrupt the emission of the game balls when the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this regard, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on condition that the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 420 exceeds the upper limit of holding.

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed based on the transmission of the pending number overflow command from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect increases, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to estimate the setting only once. For example, it is difficult to guess a setting only by information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate a setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

  Also, as described above, the reason why the overflow command for the number of retained first opening winnings is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that it is determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check processing in step S72. is there. Therefore, when it is not determined in the setting check process that the set value data is normal, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 4) exceeds the holding upper limit, it is performed. , The sub CPU 201 does not add the first starting winning opening to the overflow point. Accordingly, under the circumstances (for example, a predetermined point) where the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 4) exceeds the holding upper limit. At 49 points (50 points), when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 4) exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting check processing of step S72 (FIG. 30) If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, and the game cannot be advanced. .

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 4) exceeds the hold upper limit. 30), on condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is made in the same manner as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. A suggestive effect may be performed.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific winning opening out of the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 4), for example. Randomly determined by lottery. During the execution of the reach effect, when the main control circuit 100 transmits a winning command of the game ball to the specified winning port determined above, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, some players stop firing game balls when a reach effect with a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, during the execution of the reach effect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect . Further, in the reach production, there is a case where the expectation is low immediately when the reach production is started. In such a case, the fluctuation display is not started next for the player until the end of the reach effect, and there is a possibility that interest may be reduced. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, if the manager of the gaming machine can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine in which the player plays the game may be low. According to the example described above, such a fear can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the specific winning port is randomly determined by, for example, a lottery from among the first starting port 420, the second starting port 440, and each of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 4), It is preferable to keep confidential without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, it is interesting for the player to determine which winning opening should be aimed.

  Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is defined as the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 4). Among them, for example, a lottery is determined at random, but it is not always necessary to determine a specific winning opening at random, and a fixed winning opening may be set as a specific winning opening.

  In the first example, the second example, and the third example described later of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. You may do it.

  When a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is a starting opening, the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 30) is performed. Is The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display by the process of step S734. I do. Also, the sub CPU 201 continues to perform the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol even if the fancy effect accompanied by the reach effect is being performed. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the sound control circuit 205 or reduce the output sound volume.

(Third example)
In a third example of the setting suggestion effect, in a plurality of round games (round games) in the jackpot gaming state, the count number (i.e., the number of prizes) of the game balls that have won the special winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 4) is determined. Performed when certain conditions are met. For example, when the count switch 541 (see FIG. 8) detects that a gaming ball has won the special winning opening 540, the main CPU 101 transmits a special winning opening command to that effect to the sub control circuit 200. Based on the special winning opening command transmitted from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines how many gaming balls (however, the upper limit is 10 as described above) in the special winning opening 540 in each round game in the big hit gaming state. Recognizes whether or not a prize has been won. Then, when the combination of the winning numbers of each round game in the big hit game state becomes a predetermined combination, the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect in the above-described effect mode determination process.

  For example, in the four-round jackpot game state, the first round winning number is “7”, the second round winning number is “8”, the third round winning number is “9”, and the fourth round winning number is “9”. Is determined as a predetermined combination, and when the number of winnings matches the predetermined combination, the sub CPU 201 provides a setting suggestion effect at the end of the big hit gaming state. Execute. Further, for example, in a 10-hit jackpot gaming state, the winning number of the first round is “7”, the winning number of the second round is “8”, and the winning of the third round in four consecutive rounds. When the number is “9” and the winning number in the fourth round is “10”, the predetermined combination is determined. When the winning numbers match the predetermined combination, the sub CPU 201 The setting suggestion effect is executed during the big hit game state or at the end of the big hit game state.

  Note that the above is an example, and the predetermined combination of the winning numbers for which the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of predetermined combinations different in at least a part of the contents may be determined. Also, for example, in a plurality of round games, a plurality of non-consecutive round games (for example, in a 4-round jackpot game state, the first and fourth rounds, and in a 10-round jackpot game state). In other words, the number of winnings in the first and tenth rounds is the same as the number of winnings (arbitrary number of 10 or less), or a specific number of winnings (for example, “8” in the first round, last (9 rounds) may be a predetermined combination. In any one round game, the number of winnings is a specific number of winnings (an arbitrary number less than 10, for example, “9”, or an arbitrary number exceeding 10, for example, In the latter case, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed based on the fact that the number of winnings exceeds the upper limit (over-winning has occurred). The setting suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the setting has been made. Further, a winning number exceeding the upper limit may be determined as the winning number of any one round game in a predetermined combination.

  As described above, each round game ends when one of the conditions is satisfied when the number of winnings in the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls or when the opening time of the special winning opening 540 reaches 30 seconds. However, in most cases, the number of winnings in the special winning opening 540 usually reaches 10 balls and the game ends. Therefore, during the big hit game state, although the prize ball is obtained, the game tends to be monotonous. Therefore, in the third example of the setting suggestion effect, for example, by giving a condition that the setting suggestion effect can be executed to a combination of winning numbers in a plurality of round games, the specific effect is executed in the big hit game state. It is possible to improve the playability as to whether or not to play. It is also possible to prevent the game in the big hit game state from becoming monotonous. In addition, from the viewpoint of playability such that the player can select to obtain the execution right of the setting suggestion effect in exchange for the prize ball, at least one of the predetermined combinations of the round games Is preferably less than the upper limit (10).

  It should be noted that also in the special winning opening passage detection processing (see step S63 in FIG. 29) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 540, the same as the starting opening winning detection processing (see step S61 and FIG. 30 in FIG. 29). Alternatively, a setting check process (see FIG. 31) may be performed. Then, the setting suggestion effect in this case may be performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721).

  In the first example, the second example, and the third example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when each of the indicated conditions is satisfied. The content (possibility) suggested by the suggestion effect is not limited to this. Any information that can be suggested by the suggested effect to be performed can be applied as long as the information is useful to the player. Further, instead of the setting suggestion effect being performed, other benefits may be provided to the player. For example, when the conditions shown in the first example, the second example, and the third example of the setting suggestion effect are respectively satisfied, a privilege that a special image that is not normally displayed is displayed is provided. Or if a service can be provided via the Internet using the player's mobile terminal, a specific history may be updated on the service or a specific condition may be satisfied. A privilege may be provided.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 204 executes a drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes a voice control process (Step S208). In this process, the audio control circuit 205 performs audio control for outputting audio to the speaker 24 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the lamp control circuit 206 executes a lamp control process (step S209). In this process, the lamp control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or off the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating an effect drive motor for operating the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process in step S201 ends, each process in steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[7-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in a reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that the data has no error or lack.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, if the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the effect type (whether there is a speech notice or whether there is an SU notice) as the effect pattern. The effect content (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately formed as a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and thereafter, the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[7-2. Command transmission processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and the presentation information stored in the directory buffer. This directory table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the directory table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[7-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets a device (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence or absence of the system operation (step S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting processing.

[7-2-2. Directory table registration process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the directory table registration processing by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration processing.

[7-2-3. Message transmission processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) in accordance with the “destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

  Next, after the transmission of the message is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission processing.

[8. Extensibility of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the big hit probability, the reach probability, the change time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probable inrush rate, Although the inrush ratio is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of them may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol display section 71 is in a predetermined mode ("normal hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is set to the predetermined mode. From the closed state to the open state only during the period of. Therefore, the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state or the timing at which the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing at which game balls are fired) may be notified to the player. In this case, the frequency of notifying the firing timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the notification frequency of the fire timing).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the backup clearing process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear processing is always performed even when the setting change processing (step S24) is executed. Therefore, when the backup processing is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always stored. Cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which data is cleared is determined by the backup clear processing performed when the setting change processing is performed and the backup clear processing performed without performing the setting change processing. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, a high-probability game state is set until a predetermined number of games are executed (until a special symbol is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times), and a low level is set after the predetermined number of games are ended. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the probability gaming state (a so-called “ST machine”), when the game is controlled to the high probability gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change processing is performed. When the backup clearing process is performed without accompanying the setting change process, the probable change flag is set OFF, and when the backup clearing process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probable change flag is set ON (remaining in the high probability game state) The storage of the number of games may be held). Further, when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing, the ON setting of the probable change flag is continued when the set value is set to the same value as the previous time, and when the set value is set to a different value from the previous time. May set the probable change flag to OFF.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the jackpot gaming state, the special winning opening 540 is set when the number of gaming balls winning the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls, and when the game ball is opened. When one of the conditions is satisfied when the time has reached 30 sec, the state is closed. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit gaming state, the condition for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of gaming balls having different expected values of the number of game balls capable of causing the large winning opening 540 to win game balls in one round). A condition may be prepared), and the condition may be changed according to the set value, so that a higher set value makes it easier to select a condition having the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is conceivable that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value, so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 is likely to be longer at a higher setting value. Can be Also, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of the game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol is in the form of the ordinary hit, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. The opening time of the accessory 46 (opening time) may be made different depending on the set value, so that the higher the set value, the longer the open time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit in which the probable change flag is turned ON as shown in FIG. 1-2 or FIG. 1-4, the next big hit game is executed after the big hit gaming state ends. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440, the display of the change of the special symbol is suspended. (When the special symbol variation display is started), a shift lottery for determining whether to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). May be lowered). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting check process (steps S72 and S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the above-mentioned lottery is cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also turned off). Set).

[8-1. Extension example]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability-change inrush rate, the time-saving inrush rate) are changed according to the set value that is set. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above has been described, providing a setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a part of the configuration may be changed. Hereinafter, another embodiment in which the configuration is partially changed will be described. Note that components not particularly referred to in the description of the other embodiments below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but in the following, except for the step numbers, for example, each member such as the main CPU is given a reference numeral. I haven't.

[8-1-1. Extension example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, after the big hit gaming state ends, the high probability game is started until the next big hit gaming state is started. A description will be given using a so-called “probable variable loop machine” in which the state continues as an example. In the first extended example, an upper limit is set on the number of times the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter, referred to as “loop count”). When the loop count reaches this upper limit, the big hit game state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to the set value (such gaming machines are referred to as “limiter”). Machine). This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a table showing an example of the selectivity of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example for each set value.

  The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first extended example includes a loop number checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limit number lottery when the number of loops is 0. Lottery means, loop number counting means for incrementing the number of loops when the number of loops is within a specified range (in this example, within the range of 1 to 4), and a specified number of loops (5 in this example, the upper limit of the limiter) In this case, a game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state ends to a low probability state, and a loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. Note that the limiter number lottery may be performed at any time when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the big hit gaming state, or at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined to be, for example, one with a probability of 25%, two with a probability of 30%, and three with a probability of 25%. It is determined four times with a probability of 15% and five times with a probability of 5%. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once at a probability of 25%, twice at a probability of 25%, three times at a probability of 25%, and four times at a probability of 20%. And 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 25%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 20%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 20%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 25%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 25% , And 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 10%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. , And 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that the number of limiters is determined.

  In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the number of limiters in accordance with the set value so that the larger the set value, the larger the jackpot game state and the higher probability game state can be repeated, the one chance (the big hit) It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player in accordance with the set value at the opportunity of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state when winning once. Moreover, although the expected value for the limiter count is made different according to the set value, since the limiter count is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value based on the limiter count. Has become.

  In the first extended example, the limiter count is determined by lottery in accordance with the installation value. However, the lottery is not necessarily required. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as three times for 1.2, four times for setting 3.4, and five times for setting 5.6.

  The limiter count may be set separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

  For example, when the number of limiters is separately determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first limit number for the first special symbol is determined if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a large hit. Is determined, and the loop is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, and the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, during the above loop, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol, the loop number of the first special symbol is not incremented, and the second limiter number of the second special symbol is not increased. To determine. In this case, when one of the first limiter count and the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, the loop may be ended (control to a low-probability game state), or the first limiter count and the second limiter may be set. The loop may be terminated when both the count reaches the limiter count.

  Also, for example, in the case where the above-mentioned limiter frequency is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is a big hit, the limiter count is determined, and during the loop, whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the count. When the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called stochastic loop machine, but is not necessarily a stochastic loop machine. For example, the above-described technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also. The “ST machine” means that the game state after the big hit game state is completed is controlled to the high-probability game state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability game state is controlled a predetermined number of times (hereinafter “ST times”). This is a pachinko game machine that continues until the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the predetermined number of special symbols are displayed, the high-probability gaming state is ended and the game is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an “ST machine”, the degree of expectation for the limiter count can be varied according to the set value. In other words, the higher the set value, the more the large hit game state and the high probability game state can be repeated, so that one chance (the opportunity to be controlled to the low probability game state when one big hit is won) is achieved. ), It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player according to the set value.

  In the so-called “ST machine”, the “ST times” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the number of STs can be varied according to the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 72 times in setting 6. By setting the number of times to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of ST times. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of times of ST is made different according to the set value, it is preferable that the number of times saved is common to all set values. For example, when the number of STs or the expected value of the number of STs is 60 for setting 1, 63 for setting 2, 66 for setting 3, 69 for setting 4, 72 for setting 5, and 75 for setting 6. For example, it is conceivable that the number of time savings is set to, for example, 60 times for all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, in which the high-probability game state can be grasped until the ST number reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games). Regardless of whether the game state is the high-probability game state, it is preferable to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp that the game state is the high-probability game state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. This makes it possible to make the ST count and the expected value of the ST count different according to the set value while preventing the player from noticing the set value.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, the setting check process (steps S72 and S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting is not normal in the setting check process (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed), By executing the setting change process (step S24), the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) without the number of loops reaching the limiter number (the probable change flag is also set to OFF).

[8-1-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the second extended example has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is defined as a falling area of a game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition, as a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU makes a special symbol big hit determination with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and makes a small hit hit determination if the result of this big hit determination is a loss. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  In the second extended example, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to OFF, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a second special symbol game, Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in a time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, for example, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, the small hit hit determination need not be performed.

  When the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, the main CPU activates the predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game in which the small hitting game is set to the open mode, and a payout / firing control circuit based on the fact that the game ball has won in the specific area opened in the small hitting game by executing the small hitting game. Payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

  In the second extended example, the number of times saved is set to, for example, five, and a specific port is provided in a specific area. Then, for example, when a game ball wins as a normal hit in the five time-saving gaming states and wins at the starting port, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece is activated and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area further enters the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. If the normal hit has not been achieved in the five time-saving gaming states, the main CPU ends the time-saving gaming state and controls the non-time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing of the game ball toward the right area of the game area. In the non-time-saving game state, the game is performed by left-handed firing of the game ball toward the left area of the game area. A game is played.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the second extended example, by changing at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game according to the set value, for example, the time reduction gaming state in which the second special symbol game is mainly performed In, the opening frequency of the specific area and, consequently, the payout can be varied according to the set value.

  For example, the probability of small hit is 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, 1/7 in setting 3, 1/6 in setting 4, 1/5 in setting 5, and 6 in setting 6. To 1/4. In this case, the higher the set time, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to be awarded at the starting port as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory is higher. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the winning frequency of the game ball in the specific area, and thus, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  In the second extended example, in the time saving game state, the probable change flag may be set to ON, but it is not always necessary to set the probable change flag to ON.

  Also, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is also performed in this case. . If the main CPU determines in the setting check process that the pattern is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU sets the game permission flag to OFF even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that it is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is cleared in the backup clearing process.

[8-1-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 2-2 has a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a winning of the game ball to the second starting port. A big hit determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special lottery”) is performed based on the second special symbol.

  Further, the main CPU is configured to perform a first game state (for example, a probability change flag) in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. And the time saving flag are both set to OFF, and a second gaming state in which a lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “second special lottery”) is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). And an advantageous game state in which the time-saving flag is set to OFF). In this pachinko gaming machine, if a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first game state, the game is controlled to the second game state after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, a general-purpose gate is provided in the right area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. If the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Is done. Therefore, when the game is performed by firing the game ball toward the right area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left area of the game area to perform the game. The winning frequency of the game ball to is increased.

  In the first special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value. A first jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a number of times is provided.

  In the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when a result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU makes a small hit hit determination, and when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit, A small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game is also provided.

  The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The big hit probability in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. The big hit probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 26 is 1/25 and setting 6 is 1/25.

  The main CPU, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined special winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game in which a predetermined jackpot is opened for a plurality of rounds when the jackpot is won. The big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, Good or different winning prizes.

  In addition, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to setting 1 to setting 6) regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. The small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, and 1/7 in setting 3 regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. , The setting 4 is set to 1/6, and the setting 5 is set to 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value, but is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery regardless of the set value.

  Further, the main CPU has a small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the payout / firing control circuit operates the payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning port is smaller than the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is smaller in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

  Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is zero. That is, the main CPU performs the small hit determination with the small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

  The big hit is a hit with the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit with the operation of the condition device.

  The main CPU further includes a first special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the first special symbol based on a winning of the game ball to the first opening, and a game ball to the second opening. And a second special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol change display control means stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined time. In addition, the second special symbol change display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is changed and displayed for a predetermined time.

  The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable display control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and if the gaming ball is awarded for the second starting port, the first special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins in the first opening while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second opening, even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  Also, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol fluctuation display control means is almost the same when the probability change flag is ON and OFF, but the second special symbol is changed. The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different depending on whether the probable variation flag is ON or OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 second in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the second starting port in the first game state, it takes a considerable time before the result of the second special lottery is displayed, although the second special lottery has already been performed. Becomes

  In this manner, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right area of the game area and the game ball wins in the second starting port, the second special symbol is obtained. It takes time until the variable display is stopped. In addition, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (the small special may be a small hit). Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing at which the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. For this reason, it is also difficult to perform a so-called aiming, such as causing a game ball to win in a large winning opening aiming at a timing at which the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right area of the game area, a warning sound is output from a speaker under the control of the sub CPU, for example. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by firing game balls toward, for example, a left area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, the passing of the game ball through the general-purpose gate facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second starting port through the ordinary lottery, and also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. In the second special lottery, the second special lottery wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value, so that a game in which a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right side area of the game area is used. Done.

  The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. Is preferred, but is preferably at least 10 times or more.

  In addition, the sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means that controls the variable symbol display to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Is provided. However, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol in a prominent manner, even if the game ball has won the second starting port. When a game ball is awarded at one starting port, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

  The example of the above-mentioned “conspicuous mode” will be described in detail. For example, the liquid crystal display device includes a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) substantially at the center of the display area. And the result of the special lottery can be displayed. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, a circle or a circle) that can be displayed in a variable manner (eg, blinks) in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Such a shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is much larger than the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is more on the first symbol to the third symbol than on the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, in the first game state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the sub CPU performs the variable display only on the fourth symbol without performing the variable display on the first to third symbols. When a game ball wins at one starting port, the first symbol to the third symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is also performed. In this manner, in the first gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a prominent manner, and the gaming ball is inserted at the first starting port. Can be realized in such a manner that the display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins the prize is conspicuous.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 2-2, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball has won the second starting port, but the second gaming state In this case, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is not only facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. In addition, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. (From 1/30 to 1/25, depending on the setting), the big wins are opened with small hits at a high frequency, and the time reduction flag is not set (ie, normal lottery). Without increasing the frequency of execution), it is possible to increase the chances that game balls as prizes are paid out. In addition, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit depends on the set setting, and therefore even if the big hit game is not executed, the payout is made according to the set value. Can be made different.

  Also, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is also performed in this case. . Therefore, for example, in the second game state, the main CPU also performs the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 even when a game ball wins in the first starting port during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU turns off the game permission flag and executes an abnormal process. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit. Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display in the second game state is a small hit, the result including the information indicating the second game state and the information indicating the small hit is also included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clearing process, the game permission flag is not set to ON.

[8-1-4. Extension example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the third extended example is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined as a falling area of a game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition, as a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU makes a special symbol big hit determination with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and makes a small hit hit determination if the result of this big hit determination is a loss. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  In the third extended example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, for example, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port and a second special symbol game, Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in a time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, for example, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, the small hit hit determination need not be performed.

  The main CPU activates a predetermined movable piece when the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, and the main movable CPU operates inside the specific area. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the predetermined movable piece is actuated in this way, the game ball enters the specific area, and when the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected (accepted) to enter the specific port, the main The CPU controls the big hit game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a big hit, the main CPU performs the first big hit game in which the round game for opening the big winning port is performed over a plurality of rounds. A first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and a round game for activating the predetermined movable piece based on a game ball entering the specific port when the small hit game is executed over a plurality of rounds. And a second big hit game control means for controlling a second big hit game state to be performed.

  In such a pachinko game machine, in the extended example 3, the ease of winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) is set to the set value. It is different according to. Also in the third extended example, the result of the ordinary symbol determination performed based on detecting that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player makes a right hit is a normal hit. At times, the electric accessory is usually controlled from the closed state to the open state. Normally, when the electric accessory is in an open state, winning of the game ball to the starting port is facilitated. As a method of changing the execution frequency of the small hitting game according to the set value, for example, if the probability of a normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value, Can be realized.

  As a method of changing the ease of winning of a game ball to the starting port according to the set value, a method of changing the probability of a normal hit in the ordinary symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

  For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and 6 for setting 6. To 1/10. In this case, the higher the set time, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to be awarded at the starting port as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory is higher. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of execution of the small hit game, and thus the chance of being controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  Also in this extended example 3, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU 101, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is performed. Be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is cleared in the backup clearing process.

[8-1-5. Extension example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state by itself. , The condition device is operated based on the premise that the game ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the assumption that the condition device has been operated, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right-of-casual-actuation-operated right gate, and FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode of game balls passing through a left-gate-of-casual-actuation-operation left gate.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth extended example is provided with an accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and an accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 in the gaming area. In addition, a sorting device 1120 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area to one of a continuously-operated-item left gate 1100 and a continuously-operated-item right gate 1110 is provided by a sorting unit 1100. It is arranged above 1110.

  A left gate sensor 1100 and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of a game ball are provided in the left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110, respectively. In the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor, the detection of the passage of the game ball is normally disabled, and the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball passes either one of the left-hand actor continuous operation left gate 1100 and the right-hand actor continuous operation right gate 1110. Invalidated based on detection of passage.

  When the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of eight rounds is executed. When the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the right gate 1110, the main CPU determines the 2R big hitting game state (selection rate 50%) in which the two rounds of the round game are executed, and the 16th round Of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the state is controlled to the jackpot game state determined by the lottery.

  It should be noted that a big hit occurs when the left gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the left-to-be-operated operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the right-to-use gate 1110 to continuously operate. The expected value of the prize ball amount paid out in the gaming state is the same.

  Also, the game ball that has passed through the role of continuously operating the left gate 1100 or the continuously operated right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead is discharged out of the pachinko machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

  The distribution device 1120 distributes the game balls reaching above the distribution device 1120 to one of a role-operating item continuously operated left gate 1100 and a character-object continuously operating right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game balls easily pass through the right gate 1110 for successively operating actors (see FIG. 47), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game balls play a role. It easily passes through the left gate 1100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 48).

  In the fourth extended example, the ease of passage of a game ball is different between the left-hand-operated-portion-operating left gate 1100 and the right-hand-operated-portion-operating right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in the setting 1, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is repeated between the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds, and in the setting 2, the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3. In the setting 3, the first posture is repeated 0.9 seconds and the second posture is repeated 1.1 seconds. In the setting 4, the first posture is repeated 1.1 seconds and the second posture is repeated 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the left gate 1100, the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state is the same as when the player wins. That is, although the mode of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the game ball is detected to pass through the left gate 1100 and the right gate sensor is detected when the game ball passes through the right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of a game ball to the role of continuously operating the left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 30%) Is determined by the lottery performed at the above-described selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously actuating the right gate 1110, the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the game and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state in which the expected value to be paid out as a prize ball is higher. It is possible to increase the possibility of the operation.

  Further, in this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through one of the two gates (the successively operated right gate 1100 and the continuously operated right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is actuated, the successively actuated objects are activated. The device is configured to operate to be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is operated based on the result of the special symbol big hit determination performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball is connected to either of the above two gates. A game ball may win at the starting port before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition device has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through any of the two gates, the main CPU 101 determines the setting check processing based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, 30 (see step S72 in FIG. 30), and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 31). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to advance the game.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, two gates (operator continuous operation) are provided below the distributing device 1120, when the passage of a game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating, and when the passing of the game ball is detected. Although the right gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) are provided, the one provided below the distribution device 1120 is not necessarily limited to the accessory continuous operation gate. For example, a starting port and a general winning opening are provided. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 causes the game ball that has reached the upper side of the distribution device 1120 by a regular operation to have a starting port serving as a jackpot determination trigger for a special symbol, and a general winning not serving as the jackpot determination trigger. Distribute to the mouth and either. The operation of the distribution device 1120 is, for example, an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and a first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. .3 seconds, setting 3 repeats the first posture 0.9 seconds and second posture 1.1 seconds, setting 4 performs the first posture 1.1 seconds and the second posture 0.9 seconds. In the setting 5, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and in the setting 6, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it becomes possible to vary the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value, the game ball is fired by the player at any timing regardless of the set value. It is possible to have an interest that it is possible to aim for a prize at the starting opening.

[8-1-6. Extended example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 5 is provided with a plate-shaped guide member so that a player can easily win a game ball at the starting port as a method of varying the degree of advantage of a player according to a set value. This is made different depending on the operation of the displacement member. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a guide member and a displacement member, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation mode of the displacement member.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth extended example is a predetermined area in the gaming area 20, more specifically, an area where a game ball (hereinafter, a game ball P) can roll, In a region from 800 (not shown in FIG. 4 and the like) to the first starting port 420, a plate for guiding the rolling of the game ball P on the plane instead of the game nail (not shown in FIG. 4 and the like). A guide member 801 (a guide member 801a extends from the starting point to a position immediately before the first start port 420 when viewed from the windmill 800 and a guide member 801b extends from the start point 420 to the end point after the first start port 420) is provided. Between the 801a and the guide member 801b, a first position (open state) for facilitating the winning of the game ball P to the first starting port 420, and a difficulty for the winning of the game ball P to the first starting port 420. 2nd position Displaceable between a closed state) (slide) can be plate-like displacement member 802 is provided.

  The windmill 800 is formed of a plate-shaped member rotatably supported on a shaft (not shown) implanted on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and rotates left when viewed from the front due to the collision of the game ball P. In this case, the game ball P is distributed to the left while the game ball P is rotated to the right as viewed from the front, and is distributed to the right (that is, the direction toward the first starting port 420).

  The guide member 801 guides the game balls P distributed by the windmill 800 in a direction toward the first starting port 420. At this time, as shown in FIG. 50, when the displacement member 802 is at the second position (when it is in the closed state), the game ball P guided by the guide member 801 basically has the first starting port. It is guided to the out port 57 without winning the 420. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51, when the displacement member 802 is at the first position (when it is in an open state), the game ball P guided by the guide member 801 basically has the first starting port 420. You will be led to win.

  That is, due to the displacement of the displacement member 802, as the width of the space toward the lower side between the guide member 801a and the guide member 801b increases, the winning of the game ball P to the first starting port 420 becomes relatively easy. As the ball becomes shorter, it becomes relatively difficult to win the game ball P to the first starting port 420. Note that a predetermined area in the game area 20 where the guide member 801 and the displacement member 802 are provided (for example, a height direction when a base from the left end of the guide member 801a to the right end of the guide member 801b in FIGS. 49 to 51 is a bottom side) Game nails or the like may not be implanted in the (fixed area).

  The displacement operation of the displacement member 802 is controlled by driving and controlling a displacement member solenoid (not shown) connected to the main control circuit 100 by the main CPU 101. Here, the displacement member 802 is repeatedly displaced from the second position to the first position (from the closed state to the open state) and from the first position to the second position (from the open state to the closed state) at regular intervals. I have. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth extended example, the driving pattern (operation mode) of the displacement member 802 is changed according to the set value (for example, setting 1 to 6), so that the degree of advantage of the player is changed. It is like that. Specifically, the drive pattern is set so that the time during which the displacement member 802 is in the open state becomes relatively longer as the set value increases.

  For example, a set of the displacement operation from the second position to the first position and the displacement operation from the first position to the second position are performed in a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds). In this case, the drive pattern is set so that the interval time from the end of the displacement operation to the start of the next displacement operation (that is, the time during which the second position is maintained) becomes shorter as the set value becomes higher. As an example, when the set value is set to 1, the interval time is set to 15 seconds, when the set value is set to 2, the interval time is set to 14 seconds, when the set value is set to 3, the interval time is set to 13 seconds, and the set value is set to 4 , The interval time is set to 12 seconds, when the set value is set to 5, the interval time is set to 11 seconds, and when the set value is set to 6, the interval time is set to 10 seconds.

  By doing so, the higher the set value, the more the number of times the displacement member 802 is opened (the longer the opening time per predetermined period), and the more advantageous the player is. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth extended example, a method for increasing the degree of advantage of the player is not limited to this. For example, the drive pattern may be set so that the time during which the displacement member 802 is changed from the second position to the first position and held at the first position is longer as the set value is higher. Further, for example, the operation mode of the set of displacement operations may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the operation mode may be appropriately set such that the higher the set value, the greater the number of times the displacement member 802 is opened (the longer the opening time per predetermined period).

  In addition, in the fifth extended example, the guide member 801 guides the game ball P in a path from the windmill 800 to the first starting port 420, and the displacement member 802 is provided above the first starting port 420. However, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 is not limited to this. The object that makes it difficult or difficult to receive (ie, enter or pass) the game ball P by the displacement member is not limited to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 420), and the second starting port (for example, The second starting port 440), a passing gate (for example, the passing gate 49), a general winning port (for example, a general winning port 53, 54, 55, 56), a big winning port (for example, a big winning port 540), or other An object such as a specific area to which a certain benefit can be given to a player can be appropriately targeted. When the displacement member is provided in any of the target regions, a guide member may be provided as appropriate on a part or all of the path to the target region in the game region 20.

  In addition, in the extended example 5, the guide member 801 and the displacement member 802 are formed of plate-shaped members in order to more reliably guide the game ball P. However, the configurations of the guide member 801 and the displacement member 802 are not limited. Not limited to this. A columnar or spherical member, or a combination of these members may be used. Further, it is not limited to a member having a certain rigidity (for example, polycarbonate), but may be a member having a certain degree of elasticity. In addition, the guide member 801 and the displacement member 802 do not necessarily need to be separate members, but are formed integrally, guide the game ball P in a predetermined area, and make it easy or difficult to enter or pass a specific area. It may be provided with a mechanism for performing the operation.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 has one or a plurality of the specific areas where a special area is provided in the game area to which a certain benefit can be given to the player by entering or passing the game ball. A guide member for guiding a game ball rolling on at least a part of a route to the specific region, and facilitating or making it difficult for the game ball to enter or pass the specific region. And any displacement member for providing the same.

  In this extended example 5, in a predetermined area in the game area, a plate-like guide member (for example, the guide member 801) guides the game ball in place of the game nail or the like. Also, the game ball guided by the guide member can easily reach a specific area when the displacement member (for example, the displacement member 802) is in the open state, while the displacement member is in the closed state. If so, it is difficult to reach a specific area. The operation mode of the displacement member can be set differently according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately manage the degree of advantage of the player.

[8-1-7. Extended example 6]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 6 relates to the setting suggestion effect described above, and as a method for changing the conditions under which the setting suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, a rotation functioning as a game ball distribution device in a predetermined area of the game area 20. The body (Kroon) is provided. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution device (clone) according to the sixth example of extension, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth extended example is a distribution device () for distributing a falling direction of a game ball P that has rolled to reach a predetermined area in a predetermined area within the game area 20. Crown 900). In addition, a blade member (not shown) that is displaced from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period based on a predetermined open condition being established is provided on a path reaching the predetermined area, and such a blade member is electrically connected. , A state in which it is difficult or easy for the game ball P to reach the predetermined area may be created. In addition, a predetermined area where the crane 900 is provided may be formed at the position where the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 are provided. That is, the predetermined area in which the clune 900 is provided may be any area in the game area 20.

  The croon 900 is formed of a dish-shaped member (rotating body) that is mounted on a rotating shaft that is erected in parallel or substantially parallel to the game board in a predetermined area in the game area 20, and the rotating shaft rotates. As it rotates, it rotates at a constant speed. The rotation of the rotating shaft is performed by controlling the driving of a motor (not shown) by the main CPU 101. Further, a rib is provided on the outer periphery of the rotating body to prevent the game ball from spilling outward. In addition, it is possible to distribute the falling direction of the game ball (that is, the movement path) by the game ball P, which is arranged at equal or substantially equal intervals on the surface of the rotating body and flows on the rotating body, flows in on the rotating body. A first passage port 901, a second passage port 902, and a third passage port 903 are provided.

  It should be noted that the configuration of the clune 900 is an example, and the configuration is not limited to this. That is, any configuration may be adopted as long as the configuration is such that the predetermined member can be driven by the predetermined drive mechanism to distribute the movement path of the game ball that has reached the predetermined region. Further, the number of passage ports is not limited to three. The number may be two or four or more.

  The first passage opening 901 is provided with a first passage opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting that the game ball P has passed through the first passage opening 901. This first passage switch is connected to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port 105.

  The second passage opening 902 is provided with a second passage opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting that the game ball P has passed through the second passage opening 902. This second passage switch is connected to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port 105.

  The third passage opening 903 is provided with a third passage opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting that the game ball P has passed through the third passage opening 903. This first passage switch is connected to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port 105.

  In the sixth extended example, the first passage port 901 functions as a first starting port, and the second passage port 902 functions as a second starting port. Therefore, the first passage opening switch also functions as a first starting opening switch, and the second passage opening switch also functions as a second starting opening switch. Note that the third passage port 903 does not function as a starting port. However, the function of each passage in the sixth extended example is not limited to this. One or a plurality of passage ports may function as a first starting port, and the remaining passing ports may not function as a starting port. Further, one or a plurality of passage ports may be made to function as a second starting port, and the remaining passing ports may not be made to function as a starting port. Alternatively, one or a plurality of passing openings may be made to function as a special winning opening, and the remaining passing openings may not be made to function as a special winning opening. Further, one or a plurality of passing ports may be made to function as general winning ports, and the remaining passing ports may not be made to function as general winning ports. In addition, the game machine may be configured to function as a specific area that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball passing through one or a plurality of passing ports, and not to function the remaining passing ports as the specific area. That is, the function of each passing port of the extension example 6 is assigned to any one of the first starting port, the second starting port, the special winning port, the general winning port, the specific area, or none of them. It is possible.

  In addition, in the extended example 6, based on the detection result of the first to third passage port switches, the entry history indicating which passage port the game ball P has passed is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, at least four times). Minutes can be stored. The ball entry history may be stored in the main RAM 103 by the main CPU 101 or may be stored in the work RAM 203 of the sub CPU 201 based on a command from the main CPU 101.

  In this extended example 6, when the ball entry history has a predetermined ball entry pattern, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a predetermined setting suggestion effect. In this extended example 6, an example relating to the execution decision of the setting suggestion effect is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in this extended example 6, the entry history indicating that the game ball P has passed through the first passage 901 is set to “1”, and the game ball P has passed through the second passage 902. When the entry history indicating that the game ball P has passed through the third passage opening 903 is "2", the entry history indicating that the game ball P has passed through the third passage opening 903 is "3", and the same entry history is obtained three consecutive times, When the same ball entry history is obtained four times in succession, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed with the execution probability shown in FIG. 53, and the effect content is determined at a different ratio based on the setting value. Is done.

  For example, when the ball entry history is a ball entry pattern (passing opening) of “1”, “1”, “1”, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of “25%”. If the set value is “1”, the effect content becomes “setting suggestive effect 1” with a probability of “75%”, and the effect content becomes “setting suggestive effect 2” with a probability of “20%”, and “5%” The effect content becomes “setting suggestion effect 3” with the probability of. On the other hand, if the set value is “6”, the effect content is “setting suggestive effect 1” with a probability of “30%”, and the effect content is “setting suggestive effect 2” with a probability of “20%”, and “50”. %, The effect content becomes “setting suggestion effect 3”.

  Note that the form of the ball entry pattern (passing opening) shown in FIG. 53 is an example, and the ball entering pattern (passing opening) for which it is possible to determine that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed is not limited to this. For example, when the ball entry history has a ball entry pattern (passing opening) of “1”, “2”, or “3”, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (for example, “10%”). You may do so. That is, the entry pattern (passing opening) for which it is possible to determine that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed can appropriately set a part of the combination of all entry histories. Further, the determination probability of the effect content based on the setting value shown in FIG. 53 is also an example, and as a result, if the setting value can be suggested, the determination probability can be appropriately changed. .

  Here, in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, there is provided a history display section in which a display corresponding to a predetermined number of (for example, at least four) entry histories is provided, and the game sphere P is passed by any one of them. Each time the user passes through the mouth, the display contents of the history display unit are sequentially updated. For example, when the game ball P first passes through the first passage opening 901, “−−− 1” is displayed on the history display unit, and then, when the game ball P passes through the first passage opening 901. In the history display section, “−−11” is displayed. Next, when the game ball P has passed through the second passage opening 902, “−111” is displayed in the history display section, and then When the game ball P has passed through the second passage opening 902, "1 1 2 2" is displayed on the history display unit, and when the game ball P has passed through the third passage opening 903, the history display unit is displayed. Is displayed as “1 2 2 3”.

  The “setting suggestion effect 1” is, for example, one of a plurality of characters displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the “setting suggestion effect 2” is, for example, a liquid crystal display. In the display screen of the device 16, two of the plurality of characters are displayed, and “setting suggestion effect 3” is, for example, 3 out of the plurality of characters in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. One is to be displayed. In this extended example 6, as shown in FIG. 53, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to determine “setting suggestion effect 1”, and the easier it is to determine “setting suggestion effect 3”. Therefore, it is suggested that the higher the number of characters to be displayed (that is, the higher the ratio in which “setting suggestion effect 3” is determined), the higher the possibility of the high setting.

  For example, when “−11 1” is displayed on the history display section in response to the ball entry history being a ball entry pattern (passing opening) of “1”, “1”, and “1”, the setting is made. It is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the content is “setting suggestion effect 3”, and the entry history is “1”, “1”, “1”, “1” and the entry pattern (passing opening). In response to this, when "1 1 1 1" is displayed on the history display section, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. If the content is "setting suggestion effect 3", the game is played. It is easy for the player to have an expectation that the platform on which he or she is playing is at a high setting, and that the ball entry history has a ball entry pattern (passage opening) of “1,” “1,” “1”. Correspondingly, when "-111" is displayed on the history display section, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and the content is determined. Setting suggestion effect 1 ”. Next, in response to the entry history being an entry pattern (passing opening) of“ 1 ”“ 1 ”“ 1 ”“ 1 ”,“ 1 ”is displayed on the history display section. When “1 1 1” is displayed, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and if the content is “setting suggestion effect 1”, the table on which the player is playing is at a high setting. It is difficult to have the expectation of things.

  Note that the above-described “setting suggestion effects 1” to “setting suggestion effects 3” are merely examples, and the effect types that can be executed when the entry history becomes a predetermined entry pattern are not limited thereto. . For example, each of the “setting suggestion effect 1” to “setting suggestion effect 3” may be an effect in which a different character is simply displayed, or an effect in which different items are provided. It may be. Further, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 may be performed.

  For example, when “−11 1” is displayed on the history display section in response to the ball entry history being a ball entry pattern (passing opening) of “1”, “1”, and “1”, the setting is made. When it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed and the content is “setting suggestion effect 1”, the display mode of the newest hold information in the hold information corresponding to the display content of the first special symbol hold display unit 75 is changed. When the content is changed to "blue" and the content is "setting suggestion effect 2", the display mode of the latest suspension information in the suspension information corresponding to the display content of the first special symbol suspension display section 75 is "yellow". When the content is “setting suggestion effect 3”, the display mode of the newest hold information in the hold information corresponding to the display content of the first special symbol hold display section 75 is changed to “red”. . Also, when “−2 2 2” is displayed on the history display section in response to the incoming ball pattern being a “2”, “2”, or “2” incoming ball pattern (passing opening), the setting is performed. When the suggestion effect is determined to be executed and the content is “setting suggestion effect 1”, the display mode of the latest hold information in the hold information corresponding to the display content of the second special symbol hold display section 76 is When the content is changed to “blue” and the content is “setting suggestion effect 2”, the display mode of the newest suspension information in the suspension information corresponding to the display content of the second special symbol suspension display section 76 is “yellow”. When the content is “setting suggestion effect 3”, the display mode of the newest hold information in the hold information corresponding to the display content of the second special symbol hold display section 76 is changed to “red”. You may do so.

  In the sixth extended example, a distribution device (for example, a croon 900) capable of distributing a movement path of a game ball in a predetermined area in the game area is provided. In addition, the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) displays a history of distribution results of the distribution device. Then, when the distribution result of the distribution device becomes a predetermined result, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestion effect that can suggest setting value information) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

[8-1-8. Extended example 7]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 7 includes, in addition to the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 6, each of the passages (for example, the first passage 901 to the third passage 901) in the rotating body (crew) that functions as a game ball distribution device. 903) makes the role related to the setting suggestion effect variable. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution device (crewoon) according to the extension example 7, and FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cloon effect determination table according to the extension example 7.

  An example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 7 shown in FIG. 54 is different from the example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 6 shown in FIG. 52 in a first region 911 described later. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment only in that the third region is partitioned, and the remaining configuration is the same. Therefore, the description of the same configuration is omitted. Further, an example of the cloon effect determination table according to the extended example 7 shown in FIG. 55 is different from the example of the clune effect determination table according to the extended example 6 shown in FIG. Only the configuration described above is different, and since the remaining configuration is the same, the description of the same configuration is omitted. Also in this extended example 7, it is possible to appropriately adopt the various modified examples described in the extended example 6.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 7, in the rotating body of the clune 900, the area including the first passage 901 is partitioned as the first area 911, and the area including the second passage 902. Are defined as a second area 912, and an area including the third passage opening 903 is defined as a third area 913.

  For example, the first area 911 to the third area 913 are provided with effect display means including a light emitting device such as an LED on the surface or in the vicinity thereof, so that it is possible to effect display in different colors. ing. Specifically, the surface of the rotator is formed of organic EL, a projector device is provided above the rotator so that an image emitted from the projector device is projected, or the first passage 901 is provided. -An LED group is provided below the third passage port 903, and light emission from the LED group is applied to the surface side of the rotating body through the openings of the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903. . That is, the effect display is sequentially performed in a different display mode for each of the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903 (for each of the first area 911 to the third area 913 to which each of the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903 belongs). It just needs to be able to do so.

  In the extended example 7, each of the first area 911 to the third area 913 is sequentially rendered in one of the colors “blue”, “yellow”, and “red” at regular intervals (for example, 5 seconds). It is supposed to be. The effect display means for effect display on the first area 911 to the third area 913 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 200. Of course, the display control may be performed by the main control circuit 100.

  For example, when the first area 911 is effected and displayed in “blue”, the second area 912 is effected and displayed in “yellow”, and the third area 913 is effected and displayed in “red”. When a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect display of the first area 911 changes from “blue” to “yellow”, the effect display of the second area 912 changes from “yellow” to “red”, The effect display in the third area 913 changes from “red” to “blue”. Further, when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect display in the first area 911 changes from “yellow” to “red”, and the effect display in the second area 912 changes from “red” to “blue”. The effect display in the third area 913 changes from “blue” to “yellow”. In this way, the first area 911 to the third area 913 are sequentially rendered and displayed in different colors.

  Then, in the extended example 7, the game ball P has passed through any one of the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903 as a predetermined ball entry pattern that can determine whether or not to perform the predetermined setting suggestion effect. At this time, the color (display mode) of the effect display in the area (one of the first area 911 to the third area 913) corresponding to the passing opening that has passed is adopted as the ball entry history. In the extended example 7, an example of the setting suggestion effect execution determination is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the extended example 7, when the game ball P passes through any one of the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903, a region corresponding to the passed passage hole (the first region) If the color (display mode) of the effect display in any one of the areas 911 to 913 is “blue”, the entry history is set to “blue”, and the area corresponding to the passing opening (the first area 911 to 911) If the color (display mode) of the effect display in any of the third areas 913 is “yellow”, the entry history is set to “yellow”, and the area corresponding to the passing opening (the first area 911 to the third area 911) If the color (display mode) of the effect display in any of the areas 913 is “red”, the entry history is set to “red”.

  As in the case of the sixth extended example, the form of the entering ball pattern (display mode) shown in FIG. 55 is an example, and the entering ball pattern (display mode) for which it is possible to determine to execute the setting suggestion effect is not limited to this. Absent. In other words, the entry pattern (display mode) for which it is possible to determine that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed can appropriately set a part of the combinations of all entry histories. Further, as in the case of the extension example 6, the decision probability of the effect content based on the set value shown in FIG. 55 is also an example, and if the result is set to a mode in which the set value can be suggested, the decision probability is appropriately changed. It is possible to

  Further, similarly to the extension example 6, in the extension example 7, a history display unit is provided. In this case, the entry histories “1”, “2”, and “3” in the extension example 6 are replaced with “blue”, “yellow”, and “red” in the extension example 7, and a similar history display is performed. What should I do?

  In this extended example 7, a distribution device (for example, Kloon 900) capable of distributing a movement path of a game ball in a predetermined area in a game area is provided. Further, the distribution device can sequentially perform effect display in a different display mode for each distribution destination of the game ball. In addition, the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) displays the history of the effect display results when the game balls are sorted. Then, when the effect display result when the game ball is distributed is a predetermined result, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestive effect capable of suggesting set value information) can be executed. Has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

[8-1-9. Extended example 8]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 8 is, for example, a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine provided with a specific area that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on a game ball passing through the gaming area 20. The downstream side of the specific area is defined as a predetermined area, and a rotating body (crown) functioning as a game ball distribution device is provided in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cloon effect determination table according to the extension example 8.

  Note that an example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 8 has the same configuration as the example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 6 illustrated in FIG. 52. Description is omitted. However, an example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 8 may have the same configuration as the example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 7 shown in FIG.

  Further, in an example of the distribution device (crown) according to the extension example 8, the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903 simply function as passage ports related to the determination of the effect. However, as described in the extension example 6, one or a plurality of passage openings can be made to function as a general winning opening or the like.

  In this extended example 8, for example, in a non-time saving game state, it is difficult to satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, opening the blade member), and as a result, it is difficult for the game ball P to flow into the specific area. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, it is assumed that the predetermined conditions are easily satisfied, and as a result, the game balls P easily flow into the specific area. Then, for example, when the game ball P passes through the specific area in the time reduction game state, the game state shifts to the big hit game state. At this time, at least the game state after the end of the big hit game state is set as the type of the big hit game state. It is determined whether the big hit game state is a time saving game state or a big hit game state in which the game state after the end of the big hit game state is not set to the time saving game state (the non-time saving game state).

  Then, the game ball P that has passed through the specific area further rolls and reaches the clune 900. The game ball P that has reached the claw 900 finally passes through any one of the first passage port 901 to the third passage port 903 while rolling on the cune 900. At this time, the sub CPU 201 (or the main CPU 101) determines the effect content based on the type of the big hit game state (big hit content) and the entering ball pattern (passing opening). Note that when the game ball P passes through the first passage 901, the ball entry pattern (passing port) becomes “1”, and when the game ball P passes through the second passage 902, the ball entry pattern (passing) When the game ball P passes through the third passage opening 903, the entry pattern (passing opening) becomes "3". In this extended example 8, an example relating to the execution determination of the effect is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the extended example 8, when the incoming ball pattern (passing opening) is “1”, an effect corresponding to “character 1 (character 1)” is performed in the big hit game state. When the ball entry pattern (passing opening) is “2”, an effect corresponding to “character 2 (character 2)” is performed in the big hit game state. When the entry pattern (passing opening) is “3”, an effect corresponding to “character 3 (character 3)” is performed in the big hit game state. That is, a corresponding effect is performed depending on which of the first through third openings 901 to 903 has passed.

  In the big hit gaming state, first, a normal effect that can be executed from the start of the big hit to a predetermined period (when the effect corresponds to “character 1”, the effect corresponding to “character 1 normal” and “character 2”) , "Character 2 normal" and "Character 3 normal" for the effect corresponding to "Character 3") are performed. The normal effect is, for example, an effect in which a video in which the corresponding character appears is displayed, or an image that introduces the corresponding character is displayed.

  Next, a battle effect that can be executed from the lapse of a predetermined period to the end of the big hit (“Character 1 battle” when the effect corresponds to “Character 1”, and “Character 1 battle” when the effect corresponds to “Character 2”) If it is an effect corresponding to “2 battle” or “character 3”, “character 3 battle”) is performed. The battle effect is, for example, an effect in which an image showing a battle scene of a corresponding character and an enemy character is displayed. In this battle effect, the degree of advantage of the player is suggested according to the content of the big hit. For example, in the case of a time-saving big hit, the battle content indicating that the corresponding character is dominant is likely to be displayed, and in the case of no time-saving big hit, the battle content indicating that the corresponding character is inferior is easily displayed.

  Next, a notification effect that can be executed at the end of the big hit (in the case of a big hit without a shortage of time where the player's advantage is low, and when the effect corresponds to "Character 1", "Character 1 defeat", "Character 2") When the effect corresponds to "Character 2 defeat", and when the effect corresponds to "Character 3", the character is "Character 3 defeat". “1”, “Character 1 victory”, “Character 2”, “Character 2 victory”, and “Character 3”, “Character 3 victory” ") Is performed. The announcement effect is an effect subsequent to the battle effect. This is an effect in which an image indicating that is displayed. That is, the degree of advantage of the player in the game state after the end of the big hit game state is notified by the final result of the battle.

  Here, when the “victory” effect is executed, and when the effect corresponds to “character 1”, a setting suggestion effect is performed with a probability of “10%”, and the effect corresponds to “character 2”. Sometimes, a setting suggestion effect is performed with a probability of “25%”, and when the effect corresponds to “Character 3”, a setting suggestion effect is performed with a probability of “50%”. Note that the setting suggestion effect performed here may indirectly suggest the set value that is set, or may directly suggest the set value. The setting value may be appropriately suggested in the method described above.

  In addition, in the extended example 8, in the big hit game state, it is assumed that a normal effect, a battle effect, and a notification effect are performed in accordance with the character corresponding to the passage, and when the notification effect is a “winning” effect, Furthermore, the setting suggestion effect can be performed at a probability corresponding to the character corresponding to the passage, but the mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be performed at a probability corresponding to the character corresponding to the passage is limited to this. Absent. For example, the effect during the jackpot game state is basically common to the case where the setting suggestion effect can be performed and the case where the setting suggestion effect cannot be performed, and a specific point in time of the effect during the jackpot game state (from the start time to the end time) At the time point), the setting suggestion effect may be performed at a probability corresponding to the character corresponding to the passage opening. In addition, at a specific point in time after the end of the jackpot game state (for example, at an arbitrary point in time such as the first game or the fourth game after the end of the jackpot), a setting suggestion effect is performed with a probability corresponding to the character corresponding to the passage. You may be able to be.

  In addition, in the extended example 8, the clune 900 is provided on the downstream side of the specific area where the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball, but the position where the clune 900 is provided is not limited to this. For example, the first starting port or the second starting port may be a region through which a game ball can pass, and the clune 900 may be provided downstream of the region. That is, the distribution device may be provided on the downstream side of an area where a certain benefit is given to the player based on the passing of the game ball. In this case, the setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion at a specific time point (for example, at an arbitrary time point such as after 10 games) after the game ball has passed through any of the passing openings, with a probability according to the character corresponding to the passing opening. What is necessary is just to be able to perform an effect.

  In this extended example 8, a distribution device (which can distribute the movement path of the game ball to the downstream side of an area (for example, a specific area) in which a privilege can be given to the player based on the passage of the game ball) For example, a clune 900) is provided. Also, a specific effect according to the distribution result of the distribution device can be executed. Further, when a specific execution condition is satisfied, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestion effect capable of suggesting set value information) is provided at a probability corresponding to the distribution result of the distribution device. It is executable. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

  In addition, in the extension examples 6 to 8, a predetermined suggestion effect capable of suggesting the set value information can be executed according to the distribution result of the distribution device or the effect display result when the game ball is distributed. However, the content (possibility) indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect is not limited to this. Whether or not the gaming state is a gaming state in which the player has a high degree of advantage, for example, in the case of having a non-probable variation gaming state and a probable variation gaming state, a predetermined suggestion indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probable variation gaming state It may be possible to suggest by directing. That is, any information that can be suggested by the predetermined suggestion effect can be applied as long as the information is useful to the player.

[8-1-10. Extension example 9]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 9 is based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned extension example 2-2 (so-called “small hit RUSH machine”), and the timing at which the end of the probable change gaming state is determined to be a drop lottery. By changing the probability of winning in this drop lottery (fall probability) according to the set value, the degree of advantage is maintained at a high set value or more than at a low set value It is possible to do. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the falling probability setting according to the extension example 9.

  As described in the extended example 2-2, in the second game state (probable change game state), the second special symbol is set to have a shorter fluctuation time than in the first game state (normal game state). The game state (probable change game state) functions as an advantageous game state (small hit RUSH state) that is easily controlled to the small hit game state. Here, when the probability change game state is made to continue to the next big hit game state, for example, if the big hit probability of the normal game state is 1/300 in setting 1, and 1/250 in setting 6, the probability change game state Is a high probability at the same magnification (for example, 10 times). Therefore, for example, the setting 1 becomes 1/30 and the setting 6 becomes 1/25. Then, assuming that the small-hit probability of the probability-variable gaming state is a common probability (for example, 1/2) between the set values, the setting 6 is more advantageous than the setting 1 even though the setting 6 is more advantageous to the player than the setting 1. Also, setting 6 makes it easier to end the small hit RUSH state. Therefore, in the extended example 9, the end of the probable change game state is determined to be a time when the falling lottery is won, and the probability of winning the falling lottery (fall probability) is changed according to the set value. Thus, the expected value of the duration of the small hit RUSH state when the set value is high (the continuation rate and the number of fluctuations of the probability change described later) becomes larger than the expected value of the duration of the small hit RUSH state when the set value is low. Like that.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the extended example 9, the jackpot probability (A: jackpot probability) of the second special lottery in the normal gaming state at a set value (for example, setting 1) having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player. (Normal)) is set to, for example, “1 / 199.8” (the number of judgment value data that becomes a big hit: 328/65536), and the big hit probability (B: big hit probability (probable change)) of the second special lottery in the probable change game state ) Is set to, for example, “1 / 99.2” (the number of judgment value data that becomes a big hit: 329/65536), and the probability (C: falling probability) of winning in the falling lottery in the second special lottery in the certainty changing game state is set. For example, it is set to "1/192/2" (the number of judgment value data at which a fall occurs: 3229/65536).

  In addition, in the extended example 9, the jackpot probability (A: jackpot probability (normal)) of the second special lottery in the normal gaming state at a set value (for example, setting 6) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player is, for example, It is set to "1/192/2" (number of judgment value data to be a big hit: 329/65536), and the big hit probability (B: big hit probability (probable change)) of the second special lottery in the probable change game state is set to "198. "1/6" (the number of judgment value data to be a big hit: 330/65536), and the probability of winning the falling lottery (C: falling probability) in the second special lottery in the probable change gaming state is, for example, "199.8 minutes". "1" (the number of judgment value data to be dropped: 328/65536).

  In addition, in the extension example 9, the small hit probability of the second special lottery in the certainty-variable game state at a set value (for example, setting 1) having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player is set to, for example, “1/2”. Then, the small hitting probability of the second special lottery in the probability-variable gaming state at a setting value (for example, setting 6) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player is set to, for example, “1/2”. That is, the small hit probability is set to a common probability among the set values. Thus, the length of the “continuation period of the probable change game state” = “the expected value of the payout in the probable change game state” can be set to be greater or smaller, and the payout design can be easily performed. However, the setting of the small hit probability is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set so as to be within a predetermined payout rate range. Further, as described in the extended example 2-2, the small hit probability may be set to a different probability between the set values.

  In this extended example 9, as in the above example, the jackpot probability and the fall probability of the second special lottery in the probability change game state are set, and as a result, in the probability change game state, the player wins the fall lottery and falls into the normal game state. The expected value of the probability (D: probability change continuation rate) that the probability change game state continues due to the previous big hit is, for example, “49.87%” at a set value (for example, setting 1) having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player. ≒ approximately “50%”, and a set value (for example, setting 6) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player is, for example, “50.03%” ≒ approximately “50%”. The probability that the game state will change to the certainty game state later is 100%). Note that the expected value of the “probable change continuation rate” is, for example, when the probability of being in the probable change game state after the big hit game state is not 100%, just before winning in the drop lottery and falling to the normal game state in the probable change game state It may indicate a probability of a big hit (rensou probability). In this case, the probable change continuation rate can be calculated based on the extended play probability and the probability of being in the probable change game state after the big hit game state.

  In the extended example 9, as in the above example, the jackpot probability and the fall probability of the second special lottery in the probability change game state are set. As a result, in the probability change game state, neither the jackpot nor the fall lottery is won, and the probability change game is not won. The expected value of the number of fluctuations in which the state continues (E: probable fluctuation number) is, for example, “99.60 times” １００about “100 times” for a set value (for example, setting 1) having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player. In a setting value (for example, setting 6) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player, for example, “99.60 times” ≒ about “100 times”.

  In addition, in this extension example 9, between a set value (for example, setting 1) having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player and a set value (for example, setting 6) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player, Although the jackpot probability and the fall probability are set so that the expected values of the probability variation continuation rate and the probability variation number are the same or substantially the same, the above-mentioned probability setting is not limited to this. For example, the expected values of the probability variation continuation rate and the probability variation number are set values (for example, setting values) that are relatively more advantageous for the player than setting values (for example, setting 1) that are relatively less advantageous for the player. The above probability may be set so that 6) is higher. In this case, for example, at a set value (for example, setting 6) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player, if the falling probability is made lower than that described above, the expected values of the probability of continuation of the probability and the number of variations of the probability are increased. Can be.

  Further, in the extended example 9, in the pachinko gaming machine equipped with the small hit RUSH state, the example is described in which the falling probability during the small hit RUSH state is changed. Even if the pachinko gaming machine is not used, the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an advantageous gaming state (probably changed gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and determines that the end of the advantageous gaming state is determined when the falling lottery is won. Is also applicable. In this case, similarly to the above, the expected value of the duration of the advantageous gaming state when the setting value having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player is set is the setting value of the relatively low degree of advantage for the player. The falling probability and the like may be set so as to be equal to or more than the expected value of the duration of the advantageous gaming state when set.

  In this extended example 9, in an advantageous game state (for example, a probable change game state) in which the small hitting game state is easily controlled, a transition to the normal game state is achieved when the player wins the falling lottery. When the first set value (for example, setting 1) is set, the jackpot probability in the advantageous gaming state is set to the first probability (for example, “1 / 99.2”), and the second When a set value (for example, setting 6) is set, the big probability in the advantageous gaming state is set to a second probability (for example, “1 / 18.6”) higher than the first probability. Then, the expected value of the duration of the advantageous gaming state when the second set value is set (for example, the continuation rate of change or the number of variances) is set in the advantageous game state when the first set value is set. The fall probability is set to be equal to or greater than the expected value of the duration. Therefore, the duration of the advantageous gaming state can be made appropriate according to the set value.

[8-1-11. Extended example 10]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 10 does not make the data relating to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but can change the game property of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. . In addition, in the extended example 10, the configuration is such that the set value can be set to any one of the five stages of the setting 1 to the setting 5. Can be arbitrarily determined.

  Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, for example, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for a special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, five rounds Control to the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, and the amount of prize balls paid out in a single jackpot game state is relatively small. It becomes possible to execute a game with game characteristics.

  In addition, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, for example, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends to the high probability gaming state, and after a predetermined period, the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state ends. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine.

  When the set value is set to setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a special probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines, for example, whether or not to set a probability change flag to ON using a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probable variable loop machine.

  When the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of, for example, a special probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines, for example, whether or not to set a probability change flag to ON using a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set on the number of times the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop count”). When the loop count reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The second game state is controlled to the low-probability game state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. In the above-described game characteristics, if the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is continued until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability gaming state after the big-hit gaming state ends is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined period has elapsed.

  When the set value is set to setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU always sets the probability change flag to ON when the big hit game state ends or at a certain probability, and when the probability change flag is set to ON, the main CPU changes the game state after the big hit game state ends. , Control to a high probability gaming state. In addition, in the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU performs a gaming state transition lottery when performing a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining that the gaming state is to be transitioned in the gaming state transition lottery, sets the probability change flag to OFF. Then, control is performed to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed in the high-probability game state to shift to the low-probability game state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 10, the pachinko gaming machine can change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine in accordance with the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, for example. The game can be executed by one unit.

  Note that, in the above, a game with a game property called a so-called sweet digital game can be executed in the setting 1, a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine can be executed in the setting 2, and a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine can be executed in the setting 3. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probable variable loop machine, a game with a game property called a limiter machine in setting 4 and a game with a low probability in a high probability game state in setting 5. Although it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed for shifting to the stochastic game state, it is not essential that all these game properties can be executed according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch between a game property called a so-called ST machine and a game property called a so-called probable loop machine in accordance with the set value. Both the game property called the so-called ST machine and the game property called the so-called probable loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game state, but the high-probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether the game continues to the next jackpot game state or ends halfway. In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine in a wider range. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the interest while having fun.

[8-1-12. Other extension examples]
The present invention can be applied to all the gaming machines in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs a game using a game medium and a bonus is provided based on the result of the game. That is, a game is performed by a game medium being fired or inserted by the action of a physical player, and not only in a form in which the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also in the main control circuit 100 itself, The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game balls or a game performed without medals. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

  When managed by the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device includes a ROM and a RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game device (not shown). The medium handling device is connected to the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium insertion operation). Operation) or the winning of the role related to the payout of the game medium (the win is established), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, paying out the game medium to the player, and obtaining the required game medium) Operation) or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device displays not only the actual number of game media but also the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a function of allowing a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, there is a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In such a case, it is desirable that the player has such a capability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, unless through the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for receiving electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on a game medium handling device side. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above-mentioned lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when ending the game, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange a prize, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another stand.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game media possessed by the player is transmitted. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalent may be discharged, or the storage medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game arcade can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

  Further, in a gaming machine or a game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown), a lock operation for locking game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed. Is also good. At this time, information that can only be known to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging unit provided in the game medium handling device.

  In the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine has been described. However, the same applies to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It is also possible to provide a game medium of the player.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can reduce the number of components, but also prevent the player from directly touching the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of gaming machines by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In addition, an enclosure-type gaming machine configured to be able to play without discharging the game medium to the outside, and data relating to the increase and decrease of the game medium due to the consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal through the game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

  The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and fires a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. Thereby, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of possessed balls is decremented by one. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is fired from above the game area, a so-called return ball (a foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

  In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, no upper plate or lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is provided. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game balls are not actually at hand of the player, and the game balls do not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a possessed ball by lending from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a possessed ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is fired from the launch device, the possessed ball is consumed, and the number of possessed balls is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings provided in the game area, payouts are made by the number according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of possessed balls increases. In addition, the number of possessed balls increases by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending, and paying out of game media" indicates that the consumption, lending, and paying out of the ball are performed. The “increase / decrease in game media” indicates that the number of possessed balls increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. The “data relating to the increase and decrease of game media associated with the consumption, lending, and payout of game media” is data relating to a decrease in possession balls due to the launch of game balls, and an increase in possession balls due to lending and payout.

  The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball by that is added to the number of possessed balls. When a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of possessed balls to the game medium management device by an operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and receives a request for conversion from a game value managed by the game medium management device to a possessed ball (ball lending) and counting (returning) of possessed balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data on the current number of balls held. Here, the “game value” refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into a possession ball by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like in a game hall where a gaming system is installed.

  Further, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, the detection of the opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed by the backup power supply. As a result, fraudulent acts can be prevented at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

  The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted / received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. When one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

  As described above, at the transmission source, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not falsified by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, It can be confirmed that it is being sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as falsification of a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. A demodulation unit for demodulation may be provided.

  Thereby, even if a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination receives an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

  This not only confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal, by comparing the transmitted signal with the confirmation signal. Therefore, the suppression of fraudulent activities can be further strengthened.

[9. Appendix]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machine can be provided.

[9-1. First to eighth gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the pitching tendency of each gaming table can be set arbitrarily, a structural element that affects the ball entry rate to the entrance and the balling tendency is determined. Alternatively, it is only possible to change the state of the control element according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment is necessarily large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving interest. is there.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-1. First gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
A variation pattern determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed by the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern;
A symbol display control unit that performs the symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol variation display) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, and stops and displays in a manner indicating the result of the lottery. For example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
With
The variation pattern table storage means,
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 4) that is defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is determined to be a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases. 12 (variable time determination table of special symbol shown in FIG. 12).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time, and thus the more the lottery results. Expectation is raised, and it becomes possible to improve game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of executions of the lottery from a specific time is further provided.
The variation pattern table storage means,
As the setting value set by the setting change control unit increases, the probability of being determined as the short variation pattern becomes higher than the variation pattern table in another variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 14). And a special symbol change time determination table when the indicated change number is 1001 or more.
The variation pattern determination means,
When the number of times of execution of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols has been performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the number of lotteries executed by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, a variation pattern can be determined using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time increases remarkably, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times of execution, the degree of expectation of the player is increased, and it is possible to improve the gaming interest. Note that the “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, a case where a big hit lottery of a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to progress even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the display of the symbol is changed (for example, the display of the change of the special symbol), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery on the symbol change display, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of appropriateness or inadequacy, The game is configured not to proceed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-2. Second gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118);
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed by a predetermined symbol, and a result of the lottery can be indicated by a stop mode of the symbol;
A stop mode determining unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines a stop mode of the symbol that can be shown on the display unit based on a result of the lottery;
A stop mode table storage unit (for example, the program ROM 202) that stores a stop mode table (for example, a decorative symbol determination table in FIG. 4) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determination unit;
A symbol effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S207) for controlling the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means;
When the symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a first mode, a second mode, or a specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of profits that are advantageous to the player (For example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 9) for giving any profit among (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit);
With
The profit providing means,
The symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and when the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits are displayed. Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit with a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, a 10R probability variable jackpot),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases, the probability that the symbol stop mode is stopped in the specific stop mode is increased. The stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be raised.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the symbol stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control unit is the same, regardless of the setting value, while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. , The symbol stop mode is determined so that the probability of the symbol stop mode being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting change is performed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means becomes higher, the probability of stopping in the specific stop mode is increased, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. In addition, even if the stop mode of the symbol is determined to be stopped in the specific stop mode by the stop mode determination unit, a game control unit that controls so that the game cannot proceed (for example, the process of step S722 is executed) Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a decorative symbol fluctuating effect) is being performed, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a specific result and that the pattern stop mode is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining whether game information is appropriate or inappropriate. When it is determined that the game is not proceeded. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-3. Third gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, including a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery);
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in FIG. 15 or 16 is a big hit);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing at least a variable display of symbols,
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) for performing a variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner indicating the result of the lottery;
The symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, Toku-zu 1-1 to Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-1 to Toku-zu 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit providing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9) that provides any one of a plurality of benefits (for example, 4R regular big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit) that are advantageous to the player. A main CPU 101 for executing a jackpot game control);
With
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables storing different lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability change big hit) among the plurality of profits in accordance with a set value are stored.
The lottery means,
The lottery is configured to be able to be performed using a lottery table corresponding to a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having relatively high advantages differ according to the set value, the setting change control means sets the lottery. It is possible to vary the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value thus set, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to a player and a high-probability game state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability in a game state after the completion of the special game state is provided. And
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs according to a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time reduction game state) is further provided,
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state is different depending on a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state is different depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the symbol change display is being performed, if the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit, a lottery for the symbol change display is performed. Even if the result is the result of giving the specific profit, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery relating to the variable display of the symbols is a result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-4. Fourth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery in different lottery modes based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of game balls into each of the plurality of starting ports (for example, a main lottery that can execute the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) CPU 101);
A special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 101 for executing a big hit game control in FIG. 9) capable of executing a special game that operates based on a result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game;
With
The special lottery means,
In performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, the special lottery is performed in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control unit. Can be done differently,
The specific game execution means,
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, a higher frequency is obtained when a game ball enters the second start port than when a game ball enters the first start port. The specific game is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and the probability of the specific result can be changed regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means. The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second start port than when the game ball enters the first start port. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific game in accordance with the set value on the assumption that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve interest.

  Note that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when a game ball enters the second start port than when a game ball enters the first start port". When a game ball enters the starting port of the game ball, a hit determination (including a probability of 0) for a specific result is performed, but the probability that the specific result is obtained in the hit determination is entered for the second starting port. This includes not only a mode lower than the above but also a mode in which a hit determination situation for a specific result is not performed when a game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game in FIG. 9);
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable starting control means (for example, , Main CPU 101);
The first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the basis of the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball is moved to the second starting port (second starting port 440). Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variation display of the second special symbol based on the approach;
The first game state (for example, a normal game in which both the probable change flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF) such that the time (for example, an average time of 1000 seconds) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol affects the progress of the game. State), or a second game state (for example, a shorter time of the variable display (for example, average time 1 sec) of the second special symbol is shorter than a time (for example, an average time 10 sec) of the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a favorable game state in which the probable change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second gaming state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. In addition, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the suitability determination means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball enters the start opening (for example, the second start opening). Is determined, the game cannot be advanced without executing the specific game by the specific game execution means even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if a game ball enters a starting port (for example, a second starting port), a special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, Before the result of the second special lottery is indicated (for example, during the special symbol change display), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-5. Fifth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port,
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on a result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game in FIG. 9);
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable starting control means (for example, , Main CPU 101);
Based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific area in which a specific port is provided. A specific area variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that a game ball can easily enter (for example, receive) the game ball;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on a game ball being received in the specific port provided in the specific area;
With
The specific area variable control means,
The predetermined movable piece is configured to be actuated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area may vary according to the set value set by the setting change control unit. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result is made different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and the opportunity to give the privilege can be made different according to the set value, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
The ease of entry (e.g., acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (e.g., the probability of a normal hit is changed, By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is reduced by the set value. It is characterized in that it is performed in such a way that it can be different depending on

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will be different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
By making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is improved. Is performed in such a manner as to be different depending on the set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege granted based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area is different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting port, when it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing of step S722 A main CPU 101 for execution);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), even if a game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is displayed (for example, a special symbol) Of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined to be appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness of the game information Is configured such that the game cannot be advanced before the predetermined movable piece operates. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-6. Sixth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118);
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), special game state control means (for example, executing the big hit game control of FIG. 9) capable of controlling to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) Main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, a step S169) in which a game state after the special game state is ended can be controlled to an advantageous game state (for example, a high-probability game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A main CPU 101 which proceeds with the game after setting a flag)
After being controlled to the special game state, a counting unit (for example, a main unit) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state. CPU 101);
With
The game state control means,
When the result of the lottery in the advantageous game state is the special result, the special game state is configured to be controllable,
When the number counted by the counting means reaches a specified number, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state,
The prescribed number of times,
The apparatus is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to the specified number of times, and the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
The prescribed number of times determining means,
The lottery for determining the specified number of times is configured to be performed such that an expected value for the specified number of times differs according to a set value set by the setting change control unit.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), the specified number of times that the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for the specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Therefore, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination unit, the counting unit may perform the counting even if the number counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the game so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the specified number (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or inappropriateness of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced without reaching the specified number of loops. I have. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-7. Seventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the starting port);
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 9). A main CPU 101 for execution);
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state;
With
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode that the higher the set value set by the setting change control means the higher the advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be longer as the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher. It is characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the lottery is performed in a mode in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect is performed. Can be longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not the special game state is being controlled, it is possible to extract a random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port,
The adequacy determination means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine the suitability of the game information,
The game control means,
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, a game progress non-permission that controls so that the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the appropriateness / inappropriate determination of the game information may be executed even when the gaming machine is controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. At the same time, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-8. Eighth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., a continuously operated left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., a continuously operated right gate 1110);
An entry permitting unit (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances;
Different profits (for example, when the number of rounds is different, or when there is a starting port below the entrance), a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance. A profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 9) capable of giving the player different execution or not);
With
The approach permitting means,
Out of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball is configured to be different according to a set value set by the setting change control means. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. Thus, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance can be varied according to the set value set by the setting change control means. In addition, the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, so that the state of the game element according to the setting can be improved while improving the game entertainment. Can be suitably changed.

  Note that "a different profit can be given to a player when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance", for example, when a game is played at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs between when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting port which is a lottery trigger and the other entrance is a lottery This corresponds to the case where the winning port is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Starting ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) for performing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Game information relating to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and the variable display, the set value) Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the player is notified even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without giving a profit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the fluctuation display of the symbol, when the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit has not been given yet, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / inappropriate game information is determined in some cases. In this case, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness of the game information even though a profit may be provided to the player, the game proceeds without providing the player with a profit. It is configured so that it cannot be done. As a result, security can be ensured.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result, at least the first entry port and the second entry port are provided with entry validating means for validating the entry of a game ball (for example, a main device for operating a condition device) CPU 101).
The profit providing means,
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, an 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R big hit game state) having a profit degree higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a higher profit is likely to be given, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Becomes

  According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[9-2. Ninth game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, for example, anomalies may occur in game setting values and the like, and security is ensured. Is hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) for performing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the starting port);
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of step S72 and step S82) that determines whether the game information is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving a game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
If the symbol information is determined to be inappropriate when the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the appropriateness / inappropriate determination of the game information may be performed when the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is possible to improve.

  According to the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving security.

[9-3. Tenth game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Third subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily imply a light design load. Hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 for generating a random number value by executing a program);
Random number extracting means for extracting a random number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S73);
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, big hit random number determination table) for defining a total random number (for example, a range of big hit determination random numbers) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data); ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extracting means (for example, the process of step S118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data), the game is controlled to a special game state. Possible special game state control means;
With
The table storage means,
A lottery table in which at least the number of the total random numbers is different according to a setting value set by the setting change control means is stored,
The random number generating means,
The apparatus is characterized in that a total number of random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of being controlled to the special gaming state is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the random number for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Jackpot probability), it is possible to set the jackpot probability finer for each set value compared to a method in which the range of the jackpot determination random number is fixed and the number of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
When a random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the suitability determining means (step S1) determines whether or not the total random number generated by the random number generating means is suitable or not until the symbol variation display is started. S72, the main CPU 101 which performs the processing of step S82);
A game control means (for example, a main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game to be unable to proceed when the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be inappropriate, the game is not allowed to proceed. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[9-4. Eleventh and twelfth gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, a player can be arbitrarily set by setting the payout tendency arbitrarily. , There is a possibility that interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. It is in.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-4-1. Eleventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of winning ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440, and general winning ports 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including a starting port;
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) for granting a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on that a game ball is received in any of the plurality of winning ports;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which at least a symbol fluctuation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed;
When a variable effect of the symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening of the plurality of winning openings Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the reception of the game ball at
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball is received in the specific winning opening when the symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect). Since the setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. In addition, when the symbol fluctuating effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
A specific mode determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) that determines whether to perform the symbol fluctuating effect in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect);
A specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening when it is determined by the specific aspect determining means that the symbol variation effect is to be performed in the specific mode; (For example, the main CPU 101);
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the specific winning opening is determined not at a fixed winning opening but randomly at any of the plurality of winning openings, so that it is possible to enhance amusement of gaming. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning opening be kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, it is interesting for the player to determine which winning opening should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the setting change control means sets the game information even if a game ball is received in the specific winning opening. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information on the set value;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not suggested yet, the game information storage is performed. Suitability or inadequacy of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness, the setting value set by the setting change control unit is determined. The game cannot be advanced without suggesting the set value information. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-4-2. 12th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Starting ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) for performing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 9). A main CPU 101 for execution);
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition relating to acceptance of a game ball to the starting port (for example, that an overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.) Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port. Since the setting value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. Further, the execution of the game is promoted so that the game ball is received in the starting port. In addition, "the predetermined condition related to the reception of the game ball to the starting port is satisfied" means that, for example, although the game ball was received at the starting port, the holding upper limit was set, but the holding was not performed. It is assumed that, when a game ball is accepted at the starting port, the point is accumulated and the point reaches a predetermined point when it is not suspended due to the upper limit of the reserve, etc. However, it is not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The game control means,
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball is received in the starting port ( For example, even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc., a game progress non-permission means (e.g., a game progress non-permission means (e.g., , And a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition may be satisfied when a game ball is received at the starting port, in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness of the game information performed by the game ball being received by the starting port. When it is determined that the game is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means. As a result, security can be ensured.

  According to the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[9-5. 13th gaming machine]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and based on the result of the lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fifth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, payout management may not be easy.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payouts.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
Payout means (for example, a payout device 350) for paying out game media based on winnings as a result of the game;
Based on the result of the lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit), a special game execution means (for example, A main CPU 101 for executing the jackpot game control in FIG. 9),
Data totaling means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of totalizing data relating to the game medium paid out by the payout means;
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
With
The data aggregation means includes:
All history totaling means for totalizing the data based on all game histories,
A set value-based history tally unit that totals the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine configured to display data totalized by the all history totaling means and / or data totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), either one or both of the data totaled by the total history totaling means and the data totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means can be displayed. Ball management can be performed easily.

  According to a thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily manage payouts.

[9-6. 14th gaming machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, and thus the exchange of storage means for storing effect data necessary for executing the effect is performed. Is unnecessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that simply changing the specifications may lack interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game performance is determined in accordance with the set value. Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6)
A game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game with the game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
With
The game control means,
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on a game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game control in FIG. 9) in which a privilege according to a set value set by the setting change control means is provided based on a result of the lottery;
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to execute a game with a different game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means on one gaming machine. It is possible to give a variety of ways to utilize the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means,
When the lottery is set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending the game,
When the plurality of set values are set to the second set value, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game controller (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, a probable loop specification);
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), although both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are controlled to the high-probability game state, the first game control means The high-probability gaming state may end prematurely without continuing to the next big-hit gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is controlled to the next special gaming state by the second gaming control means. It is greatly different in that it is continuously executed until In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine with a wider range. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving entertainment.

  According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[9-7. 15th gaming machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  In this type of gaming machine, a game ball fired by a player's operation rolls while colliding with a game nail or the like provided in a game area, and finally enters a start port or a winning opening. When the player does (or passes), the above-mentioned lottery is performed or the prize balls are paid out, so that the player can obtain an advantageous game result.

  As this type of gaming machine, disclosed is one in which the ball entry rate to the starting port can be adjusted by changing the position of the starting port or changing the position of an obstacle member located above the starting port. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-46192).

(Seventh task)
However, in this type of gaming machine, since the game ball rolls randomly in the game area due to collision with a game nail or the like, there is a problem that the degree of advantage of the player may not always be properly managed. Was. In particular, such a problem becomes more remarkable when a gaming nail or the like is incorrectly adjusted.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately manage the degree of advantage of a player.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the degree of advantage of the player is different. Setting change control means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) When,
A specific area (for example, the first starting port 420) provided in a game area (for example, the gaming area 20) where the game ball can roll,
A privilege granting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of granting a privilege based on the game ball being received in the specific area;
A guide member (for example, a guide member 801) provided in the game area and guiding a game ball rolling in a predetermined area;
A displacement member (for example, a displacement member 802) that makes it easy or difficult for a game ball guided by the guide member to be received in the specific area;
Displacement member control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling an operation mode of the displacement member;
With
The displacement member control means,
The operation mode of the displacement member is controlled based on a set value set by the setting change control unit.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The setting change control means,
At least one of a first set value (for example, setting 1) and a second set value (for example, setting 6) having a higher degree of player's advantage than the first set value Can be set,
The displacement member control means,
When the second set value is set by the setting change control means, a game ball guided by the guide member is received in the specific area more than when the first set value is set. The operation mode of the displacement member is controlled so that the period for facilitating the operation becomes longer.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The guide member is
It is characterized by comprising a plate-shaped member.

  According to the gaming machines of (1) and (2), the guide member (for example, the guide member 801) guides the game ball in a predetermined area in the game area. Also, the game ball guided by the guide member can easily reach a specific area when the displacement member (for example, the displacement member 802) is in the open state, while the displacement member is in the closed state. If so, it is difficult to reach a specific area. The operation mode of the displacement member can be set differently according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately manage the degree of advantage of the player. According to the gaming machine of the above (3), in a predetermined area in the game area, a plate-like guide member (for example, the guide member 801) guides the game ball in place of the game nail or the like. Such effects are more pronounced.

  According to the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the degree of advantage of the player.

[9-8. Sixteenth to eighteenth gaming machines]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and based on the result of the lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  In this type of gaming machine, a game ball fired by a player's operation rolls while colliding with a game nail or the like provided in a game area, and finally enters a start port or a winning opening. When the player does (or passes), the above-mentioned lottery is performed or the prize balls are paid out, so that the player can obtain an advantageous game result.

  As this kind of gaming machine, the special game state to be shifted when a game ball enters a specific area includes a first special game state advantageous to the player and a second special game state unfavorable to the player. Which special game state is set is determined by lottery when a game ball enters the starting port, and it is determined that the game state shifts to the first special game state. Is satisfied, it is possible to inform the player of advantageous information indicating that the gaming state becomes the first special gaming state (see, for example, JP-A-2006-104100).

(Eighth task)
By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the movement direction of the game ball also changes to some extent as the force of firing the game ball is adjusted by the operation of the player, which is one factor of the fun of the game. .

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2006-104100, it is not possible to say that the interestingness that the moving direction of the game ball is changed is sufficiently reflected as to whether or not the advantageous information is notified. It is considered that there is room for making a device that can further improve the willingness to play and the fun of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in reporting useful information to a player.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-8-1. Sixteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A distribution device (e.g., Kloon 900) provided in a game area (e.g., the game area 20) where the game balls can roll and capable of distributing the movement path of the game balls;
A display device capable of displaying various information (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
With
The display device,
A history of the sorting results of the sorting device (for example, a ball entry history) can be displayed,
When the distribution result of the distribution device becomes a predetermined result (for example, a predetermined entering ball pattern (passing opening)), useful predetermined information (for example, setting suggestion effect) can be notified to the player. It is characterized by the following.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), if the degree of advantage of the player is different, Setting change control means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) Further comprising
The predetermined information is:
It is information on a set value set by the setting change control means.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The distribution device,
A clound device having a plurality of passage openings through which game balls can pass (for example, a first passage opening 901 to a third passage opening 903);
The display device,
While it is possible to display the history of which of the plurality of passing ports has passed through a predetermined number of times,
When the history of the predetermined number of times has a predetermined pattern, the predetermined information can be notified.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machines of the above (1) to (3), a distribution device (for example, Kloon 900) capable of distributing a movement path of a game ball in a predetermined area in a game area is provided. In addition, the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) displays a history of distribution results of the distribution device. Then, when the distribution result of the distribution device becomes a predetermined result, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestion effect that can suggest setting value information) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-8-2. 17th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A distribution device (e.g., Kloon 900) provided in a game area (e.g., the game area 20) where the game balls can roll and capable of distributing the movement path of the game balls;
A display device capable of displaying various information (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
With
The distribution device,
It is possible to sequentially display effects in different display modes for each distribution destination of the game ball,
The display device,
While it is possible to display the history of the effect display results when the game balls are distributed by the distribution device (for example, a ball entry history),
When the effect display result when the game balls are sorted by the sorting device is a predetermined result (for example, a predetermined entering pattern (display mode)), predetermined information (for example, setting (Suggested effect) can be notified.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), if the degree of advantage of the player is different, Setting change control means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) Further comprising
The predetermined information is:
It is information on a set value set by the setting change control means.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The distribution device,
A cleaning device having a plurality of passing ports (for example, a first passing port 901 to a third passing port 903);
It has a plurality of effect display areas (first area 911 to third area 913) corresponding to each of the plurality of passage openings,
The display device,
When passing through any of the plurality of passage openings, the history of the display mode of the corresponding effect display area can be displayed for a predetermined number of times,
When the history of the predetermined number of times has a predetermined pattern, the predetermined information can be notified.

  According to the gaming machines of the above (1) to (3), a distribution device (for example, Kloon 900) capable of distributing a movement path of a game ball in a predetermined area in a game area is provided. In addition, the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) displays a history of distribution results of the distribution device. Then, when the distribution result of the distribution device becomes a predetermined result, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestion effect that can suggest setting value information) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-8-3. 18th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
In a game area where the game ball can roll (for example, the game area 20), the game area is provided downstream of an area (for example, a specific area) in which a privilege can be given to a player based on the passage of the game ball. A sorting device (for example, Kloon 900) capable of sorting the movement path of the sphere,
A display device capable of displaying various information (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
With
A specific effect (for example, an effect corresponding to each character in the big hit game state) can be executed according to the distribution result of the distribution device,
When a specific execution condition is satisfied (for example, when a “victory” effect is executed), predetermined information (for example, setting information) useful to the player is provided at a probability corresponding to the distribution result of the distribution device. (Suggested production).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), if the degree of advantage of the player is different, Setting change control means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) Further comprising
The predetermined information is:
It is information on a set value set by the setting change control means.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The distribution device,
A clound device having a plurality of passage openings through which game balls can pass (for example, a first passage opening 901 to a third passage opening 903);
The specific effect is
It is executed according to which of the plurality of passing ports has passed,
The predetermined information is:
When the specific execution condition is satisfied, a notification is made with different probabilities depending on which of the plurality of passing ports has passed.

  According to the gaming machines of the above (1) to (3), the movement path of the gaming ball is set downstream of an area (for example, a specific area) in which a privilege can be given to the player based on the passing of the gaming ball. A sorting device (e.g., Kloon 900) capable of sorting is provided. Also, a specific effect according to the distribution result of the distribution device can be executed. Further, when a specific execution condition is satisfied, notification of useful information to the player (for example, a predetermined suggestion effect capable of suggesting set value information) is provided at a probability corresponding to the distribution result of the distribution device. It is executable. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

  According to the sixteenth to eighteenth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in reporting useful information to the player.

[9-9. 19th gaming machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  Also, in this type of gaming machine, in a big hit game, a special winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, and when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined number of gaming balls are won, a round which is closed again. The mainstream is a game that can be executed multiple times.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine capable of changing the display content on an effect display device when a gaming ball exceeding a prescribed number is won during a round game (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). -112239).

(Ninth problem)
However, in this type of gaming machine, there is not always a high possibility that gaming balls exceeding a specified number will win during a round game. For this reason, for example, when the specific effect is configured to be executed on condition that a game ball exceeding a specified number wins during a round game, such a specific effect that the specific effect is executed is provided to the player. It will be hard to enjoy. Therefore, it can be considered that there is room for contriving whether or not the specific effect is executed in the specific game state, so that the game performance can be further improved.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming performance with respect to whether or not a specific effect is executed in a specific gaming state. Is to do.

  In order to solve the ninth problem, the present invention provides a nineteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A specific game state execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the game;
A round game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a plurality of round games in the specific game state;
Effect executing means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) capable of executing various effects;
With
The plurality of round games,
Each is terminated based on the upper limit (for example, 10) game balls winning or when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed,
The effect executing means,
When the combination of the winning numbers of the game balls in each of the plurality of round games becomes a predetermined combination, a specific effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) can be executed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), if the degree of advantage of the player is different, Setting change control means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) Further comprising
The specific effect is
It is an effect capable of suggesting information on the set value set by the setting change control means.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The predetermined combination is
The winning number of game balls in at least one round game includes a combination determined as being less than the upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific effect is executed on condition that the combination of the winning numbers of the game balls in each of the plurality of round games is a predetermined combination. Therefore, for example, as compared with a case where a specific effect is executed on condition that a game ball exceeding a specified number wins during a round game, as to whether or not a specific effect is executed in a specific game state, The playability can be improved.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the above (2), the specific effect functions as an effect in which information about a set value set to vary the degree of advantage of the player can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest as to whether or not the specific effect is to be executed in the specific game state, and to enhance interest in executing the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), for example, a new game in which a player can select to obtain a right to execute a specific effect that suggests useful information to a player in exchange for a prize ball is provided. By adding the character, the game in the specific game state can be prevented from being monotonous, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the nineteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to improve the playability regarding whether or not a specific effect is executed in a specific gaming state.

[9-10. 20th gaming machine]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and based on the result of the lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Tenth task)
Here, for example, the high-probability game state (probable change game state) is set to an advantageous game state in which both a big hit game and a small hit game are likely to occur, and the advantageous game state is continued at least until the next big hit is reached. In the state, it is a case where it is possible to increase the number of payouts due to the occurrence of a small hit game, and when a setting difference is provided in the big hit probability, a set value which is originally relatively advantageous is set. If the set value is set to be relatively advantageous, the big hit probability becomes higher as a result, but the advantageous game state is more likely to end. There is a problem that it may be disadvantageous to the player instead.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately setting the duration of the advantageous gaming state in accordance with a set value. is there.

  In order to solve the tenth problem, the present invention provides a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the degree of advantage of the player is different. Setting change control means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that can be set (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S24) When,
An advantageous controllable game state (for example, a probable change game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, it is determined that the game mode is shifted to the probable change game state after the end of the big hit game state). Game state control means (for example, main CPU 101);
With
The setting change control means,
It is possible to set at least one of a first set value (for example, setting 1) and a second set value (for example, setting 6) different from the first set value,
The advantageous game state is
It is a gaming state that is more easily controlled to the small hitting gaming state than the normal gaming state,
It is a game state that ends when you win the falling lottery,
The advantageous game state control means,
When the first set value is set, it is determined whether or not to shift to the big hit game state with a first probability (for example, “1 / 99.2”),
When the second set value is set, it is determined whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state with a second probability (for example, “1 / 18.6”) higher than the first probability,
The expected value of the duration of the advantageous gaming state when the second set value is set (for example, the probability of continuation rate or the number of fluctuations of the probability) is the advantageous game when the first set value is set. The probability of winning in the falling lottery (for example, the falling probability) is set so as to be equal to or more than the expected value of the duration of the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The expected value of the duration of the advantageous gaming state is an expected value of the number of fluctuations in which the advantageous gaming state continues.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The advantageous game state control means,
Whichever of the first set value and the second set value is set, whether or not to shift to the small hitting game state with the same probability (for example, “「 ”) in the advantageous game state Is determined.

  According to the gaming machines of the above (1) to (3), in the advantageous gaming state (for example, the probable change gaming state) in which the small hitting gaming state is easily controlled, the game machine shifts to the normal gaming state when the winning lottery is won. When the first set value (for example, setting 1) is set, the jackpot probability in the advantageous gaming state is set to the first probability (for example, “1 / 99.2”), and the second When a set value (for example, setting 6) is set, the big probability in the advantageous gaming state is set to a second probability (for example, “1 / 18.6”) higher than the first probability. Then, the expected value of the duration of the advantageous gaming state when the second set value is set (for example, the continuation rate of change or the number of variances) is set in the advantageous game state when the first set value is set. The fall probability is set to be equal to or greater than the expected value of the duration. Therefore, the duration of the advantageous gaming state can be made appropriate according to the set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the length of the “duration of the advantageous gaming state” = “the expected value of the payout in the advantageous gaming state” can be made larger or smaller, so that the payout design can be simplified. It can be carried out.

  According to the twentieth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the duration of the advantageous gaming state can be made appropriate according to the set value.

  In the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described.However, all inventions described in this specification may be implemented without departing from the spirit of the invention, such as pachinko machines, game machines, and slots. It can be applied to machines and all other gaming machines.

16 LCD display 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (Main RAM)
201 Sub CPU

Claims (3)

A distribution device that is provided in a game area where the game balls can roll, and that can distribute the movement path of the game balls;
A display device capable of displaying various information;
With
The distribution device,
It is possible to sequentially display effects in different display modes for each distribution destination of the game ball,
The display device,
While it is possible to display the history of the effect display results when the game balls are sorted by the sorting device,
A game machine characterized by being able to notify a player of predetermined information that is useful to a player when an effect display result when a game ball is distributed by the distribution device is a predetermined result. Based on a predetermined operation, further comprising a setting change control means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that can vary the degree of advantage of the player,
The predetermined information is:
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information is information on a set value set by the setting change control unit. The distribution device,
A cloon device having a plurality of passage openings through which game balls can pass,
Having a plurality of effect display areas corresponding to each of the plurality of passage openings,
The display device,
When passing through any of the plurality of passage openings, the history of the display mode of the corresponding effect display area can be displayed for a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined information can be notified when the history of the predetermined number of times has a predetermined pattern.

Images